User’s Guide
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
1. Introduction
This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine.
• Key benefits
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
Fast high resolution printing
•
•
•
•
•
To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco
•
•
You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective output
(1,200 x 600 x 2 bit).
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
Fast, on-demand printing.
-
-
-
M337x series
For single-side printing, up to 33 ppm (A4) or up to 35 ppm (Letter).
M387x series
For single-side printing, up to 38 ppm (A4) or up to 40 ppm (Letter).
M407x series
For single-side printing, up to 40 ppm (A4) or up to 42 ppm (Letter).
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
▪
To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
▪
We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
▪
Convenience
•
•
You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 217).
Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
Key benefits
•
Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
•
•
You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
•
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
Supports various wireless network setting method
•
•
•
AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 314).
Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
•
•
•
Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
-
You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).
Using the USB cable or a network cable
-
You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
Wide range of functionality and application support
Using the Wi-Fi Direct
-
You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct feature.
•
•
Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
Key benefits
Support XOA applications (M407xFX only)
The machine supports XOA custom applications.
•
Regarding the XOA custom applications, please contact your XOA custom
application provider.
Features by models
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
Operating System
Windows
Mac
Linux
Unix
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For windows, select the printer driver and software
in the Select Software to Install window.
Software
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
SPL printer driver
PCL printer driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PS printer driver
a
●
●
●
●
●
●
XPS printer driver
Direct Printing Utility
Samsung Easy
Scan to PC Settings
Fax to PC Settings
Device Settings
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Printer Manager
Samsung Printer Status
Samsung AnyWeb Print
Samsung Easy Document Creator
●
●
●
Features by models
Software
Easy Capture Manager
SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru Admin Web Service
Easy Eco Driver
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Fax
Samsung Network PC Fax
Scan
Twain scan driver
WIA scan driver
a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing,
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features by models
Various features
Features
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
●
●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN
●
●
●
○
a
○
○
●
IEEE 1284B parallel connector
b
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN
(M387xFW only)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
Google Cloud Print™
AirPrint
Eco printing
Duplex (2-sided) printing
USB memory interface
Memory module
Optional tray (Tray2)
Mass Storage Device
Document Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Feeder
○
○
●
●
(M387xFW only)
(M407xFR/M407xHR/M407xFX
only)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Handset
●
●
●
(M387xFD/M387xHD only)
(M4072FD only)
●
●
●
(M337xHD only)
(M387xHD only)
(M407xHR only)
Features by models
Features
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
Fax
Multi-send
Delay send
Priority send
Duplex send
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(M387xFW only)
Secure receive
Duplex print
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Send/ Receive forward - fax
Send/ Receive forward - email
Send/ Receive forward - server
Scanning to email
Scanning to SMB server
Scanning to FTP server
Duplex scan
Scan
(M387xFW only)
(M407xFR/M407xHR/M407xFX
only)
Scan to PC
●
●
●
Features by models
Features
M337x series
M387x series
M407x series
Copy
ID card copying
Reduced or enlarged copying
Collation
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Poster
Clone
Auto Fit
Book
2-up/4-up
Adjust background
Margin shift
Edge erase
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Gray enhance
Duplex copy
●
●
(M387xFW only)
(M407xFR/M407xHR/M407xFX
only)
a. If you use the parallel port, you cannot use the USB cable.
b. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
bought your machine.
(●: Included, ○: Optional, Blank: Not available)
Useful to know
A paper jam has occurred.
The machine does not print.
•
•
Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 21).
•
•
•
Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing jams" on
Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
Printouts are blurry.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
•
•
•
The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing
•
•
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
•
•
Turn the product off and on again.
•
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
Downloads.
Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
About this user’s guide
2
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
General icons
•
•
Read the safety information before using the machine.
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
Icon
Text
Description
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Caution
•
•
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury.
Warning
Note
•
The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.
•
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
•
•
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
14
1. Introduction
Safety information
4
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Operating environment
Warning
3
Important safety symbols
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Warning
This could result in electric shock or fire.
•
•
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
Caution
personal injury or property damage.
The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
Do not attempt.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
15
1. Introduction
Safety information
5
Caution
Operating method
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Burns can occur.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
16
1. Introduction
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safety.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Then lift the machine:
•
•
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
6
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
Installation / Moving
•
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Warning
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
heat, and humidity.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a well-
ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the
operating temperature and humidity specification.
Otherwise, quality problems can occur and cause damage to the
machine.
17
1. Introduction
Safety information
7
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
a
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
consumables or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
You could get injured.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
Keep cleaning consumables away from children.
Children could get hurt.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
The machine should be connected to
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
the power level which is specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
18
1. Introduction
Safety information
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
When storing consumables such as toner cartridges, keep them
away from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
•
•
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Using recycled consumables, such as toner, can cause damage to
the machine.
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled consumables, a
service fee will be charged.
For consumables that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste
toner bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
•
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
•
When disposing of the consumables, follow the instructions
for disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
8
•
•
Do not wash the consumables.
Supply usage
Caution
For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user's carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Do not burn any of the consumables such as toner cartridge or
fuser unit.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
19
1. Introduction
Machine overview
9
Components
The actual component may differ from the illustration below. Some components may change depending on the circumstances.
Machine
Power cord
Quick installation guide
a
b
c
Software CD
Card reader holder
Handset
d
Misc. accessories
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.
b. M407xFX only.
d. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
20
1. Introduction
Machine overview
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
Document feeder cover
14 Output support tray
15 Output tray
Front view
Document feeder width guide
Document feeder input tray
Document feeder support tray
Document feeder output tray
16 Scanner glass
17 Scanner lid
•
•
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
There are various types of machine.
18 Front cover handle
19 Paper width guides on a multi-
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
Control panel
purpose tray
7
8
20
Control board cover
Front cover
Multi-purpose support tray
21 Paper width guides on a manual
19
a
feeder tray
17
16
b
9
22
Paper level indicator
Toner cartridge
2
1
3
20
c
d
10
11
23
24
Tray 2
Toner cartridge
Tray 1
Imaging unit
15
14
18
4
e
12 Multi-purpose (or manual feeder) 25
Handset
tray
21
5
f
g
13
26
USB memory port
Card reader holder
6
13
a. M337x series only.
b. M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series
d. M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series
f. M387x/ M407x series only.
12
11
22
7
8
10
9
23
24
g. M407xFX only.
25
26
21
1. Introduction
Machine overview
11
a
1
6
Power receptacle
EDI port for card reader
Network port
Rear view
2
3
4
7
8
9
Telephone line socket (LINE)
Extension telephone socket (EXT.)
USB port
•
•
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
There are various types of machine.
5V output port for IEEE 1284B
Rear cover handle
bc
parallel connector
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
5
Power-switch
10 Rear cover
a. M407xFX only.
c. To use the optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector, plug it to the UBS port and the 5V output
port.
7
8
9
10
22
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
•
•
•
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 8).
Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan).
12
M337xFD/M337xHD/M387xFD/M387xFW/M387xHD/M407xFD/M407xFR/M407xHR
4
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10 11
12
7
14
20
21
16
15
13
19
18
17
1
2
ID Copy
Darkness
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page 73).
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images.
Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer (see "Wireless network setup" on page 190).
a
WPS
3
4
Display screen
Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
Switches to Copy mode.
Copy
23
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
5
Switches to Fax mode.
Fax
6
7
8
9
Arrows
OK
Numeric keypad
Address Book
Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
Confirms the selection on the screen.
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Understanding keypad" on page 261).
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Storing email address" on page 259 or "Setting up
10
11
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see "Redialing
Stops current operation.
Redial/Pause
Stop/Clear
12 Power / Wake
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for
Up
more than three seconds.
Starts a job.
13
Start
14 Power Saver
Goes into sleep mode.
15
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone.
On Hook Dial
16
17
18
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
Back
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 32).
Switches to Scan mode.
Menu
Scan
19 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 134).
20
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% when you copy original documents from the scanner glass. (see
b
Reduce/Enlarge
c
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine.
Direct USB
21 Eco
Turn on the Eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing" on page 66).
a. M387xFW only.
b. M337xFD/ M337xHD only.
c. M387x/ M407x series only.
24
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
13
M407xFX
When using the touch screen, only use your finger. Sharp objects can damage the screen.
1
4
2
3
5
7
6
9
8
10
1
2
3
Touch screen
Numeric keypad
Clear
Displays the current status and allows you to access available menus (see "Introducing the touch screen" on page 37).
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Understanding pop-up keyboard" on page 262).
Deletes characters in the edit area.
4
5
Stops an operation at any time.
Stop
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for
more than three seconds.
Power / Wake
Up
25
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
6
Starts a job.
Start
7
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone.
On Hook Dial
Help
8
9
Gives detailed information about this machine’s menus or status.
Resets user setting for a job to default value.
Reset
10 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 134).
26
1. Introduction
Turning on the machine
Turn the power switch on.
2
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on
the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view"
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
1
2
1
27
1. Introduction
Installing the driver locally
14
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
Windows
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1
2
powered on.
•
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•
•
The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
3
28
1. Introduction
Installing the driver locally
•
•
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
5
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
Window.
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
1
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
2
3
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
•
The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
•
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
29
1. Introduction
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
4
15
Windows
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software.
2
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
•
For Windows 8,
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
1
2
3
4
5
From Charms, select Search > Apps.
Search and click Control Panel.
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
2
Click Programs and Features.
Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
Follow the instructions in the window.
Follow the instructions in the window.
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
•
•
If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode.
If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
30
1. Introduction
Menu overview
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.
1
M337xFD/M337xHD/M387xFD/M387xFW/M387xHD/M407xFD/M407xFR/M407xHR
•
•
•
•
An checked (√) appears next to the currently selected menu.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 219).
Accessing the menu
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used.
1
Select
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK.
2
3
4
5
6
Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK.
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button to return to the ready mode.
32
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
a
Copy Feature
Copy Setup
Fax Feature
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Collation
Layout
Stamp
Item
Opacity
Change Default
Original Type Darkness
Multi Send
Original Size
Copies
Reduce/Enlarge
Text
Light+5- Light+1 Delay Send
d
Normal
2-Up
4-Up
Text/Photo
Photo
Normal
Dark+1- Dark+5
Send Forward
Forward to Fax
Forward to Email
Forward to Server
Receive Forward
Duplex
1->1 Sided
1->2 Sided
1->2 Sided, Rotated
2->1 Sided
2->1 Sided, Rotated
2->2 Sided
Position
Watermark
Collation
Resolution
Duplex
ID Copy
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
1->1 Sided
1->2 Sided
1->2 Sided,
Rotated
2->1 Sided
2->1 Sided,
Rotated
2->2 Sided
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Message
Book Copy
Adjust Background
Off
e
Pages
Forward to Fax
Forward to PC
Forward to Email
Forward to Server
Forward & Print
Text Size
Color Mode
Position
Auto
Enhance Lev.1
Enhance Lev.2
Erase Lev.1-
Erase Lev.4
Mono
Color
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Original Size
Darkness
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Dark+1- Dark+5
Secure Receive
Off
On
Print
Original Type
Edge Erase
Off
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Dark+1- Dark+5
b
Small Original
Hole Punch
Cancel Job
Duplex
1 Sided
2 Sided
c
Book Center
Border Erase
2 Sided Rotated
a. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
b. This option does not appear when the 2-Up, 4-Up, Book copy, Duplex, Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF (DADF).
c. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
d. This option appears only when the Item option is On.
e. This option appears only when the Message option is On.
33
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Fax Setup
Scan Feature
Scan Setup
Sending
Ring to Answer USB Feature
FTP Feature
Original Size
Shared Folder
Feature
Change Default
FTP/SMB Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Redial Times
Stamp Rcv Name
Rcv Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
USB Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Fax
Confirmation
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
Color Mode
Color Mode
Color Mode
Junk Fax Setup
Color Mode
File Format
File Format
File Format
File Format
DRPD Mode
File Format
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
Image TCR
Duplex
b
Duplex Print
Darkness
Darkness
SMB Feature
Duplex
Darkness
Server
Confirmation
Shared Folder
Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
a
Dial Mode
Toll Save
Receiving
Darkness
Change Default
Email Feature
Darkness
Darkness
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Email Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Receive Mode
Fax
Tel
Color Mode
Color Mode
Color Mode
File Format
File Format
Ans/Fax
Duplex
File Format
Duplex
Duplex
Color Mode
DRPD Mode
Manual TX/RX
Darkness
Darkness
Duplex
File Format
Email Confirmation
Darkness
Duplex
a. This option may not be available depending on your country.
b. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
34
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Print Setup
System Setup
Orientation
Machine Setup
Machine ID
PDF Type
Stamp
Import Setting
Export Setting
Eco Settings
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Tray 1
Report
Maintenance
CLR Empty Msg.
c
Portrait
Landscape
Configuration
Demo Page
Network
Configuration
Supplies Information
Usage Counter
Fax Number
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude
Adjustment
Auto Continue
Auto Tray Switch
Supplies Life
Image Mgr.
Custom Color
Toner Low Alert
a
Duplex
Copies
Resolution
Clear Text
Off
Tray 2
MP Tray
Manual Feeder
Imaging Unit Low Alert
Serial Number
Default Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray 1
b
Account
Fax Received
Fax Sent
Fax Schedule Jobs
Fax Send Confirmation
Junk Fax
Email Sent
PCL Font
PS Font
EPSON Font
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
RAM Disk
Tray 2
Image Overwrite
Manual
Overwrite Method
Overwrite Times
MP Tray
Skip Blank Pages
Auto CR
Emulation
Emulation Type
Setup
Manual Feeder
Paper Source
Margin
Paper Substitution
Tray Confirmation
Tray Protection
Toner Save
Sound/Volume
KSC5843 Font
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Fax Sound
KSC5895 Font
KSSM Font
Address Book
a. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
b. This is only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.
c. This option only appears when small amount of toner is in the cartridge.
35
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
a
b
Network
Job Management
Active Job
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Protocol Management
DHCP
HTTP
Secured Job
BOOTP
WINS
Stored Job
Static
TCP/IP (IPv6)
SNMPv1/v2
SNTP
Shared Folder
IPv6 Protocol
DHCPv6 Config
Ethernet
UPnP(SSDP)
mDNS
SetIP
Ethernet Port
SLP
Ethernet Speed
802.1x
Network Configuration
Clear Settings
c
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi On/Off
Wi-Fi Settings
WPS
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Signal
Clear Wi-Fi Settings
b. This option is available when the optional mass storage device, optional memory or RAM Disk is installed.
36
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
2
Scan
Fax
When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning
When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing
M407xFX
You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
Setup
You can browse current machine settings or change
•
•
•
The home screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel.
Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models.
Job Status
You can see the jobs currently running, completed job or in
You can view the eco settings (see "Eco" on page 252).
Eco
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
Direct USB
You can enter the USB menu when USB memory is inserted
into the USB memory port on your machine (see "USB" on
•
The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting
Document
Box
You can store the printing data, print the secure page or
shared folder (see "Document box" on page 254).
Scan to
Cloud
You can scan an image and the scanned data will be stored
in the cloud service (see "Scanning with cloud service" on
Introducing the touch screen
Secure
Release
Displays the list of jobs stored in the machine. You can
delete or print the stored jobs on the list. You can also
register authentication methods to print stored jobs (see
Option
Settings
You want to customize the option settings including
darkness, original type, and more.
Toner Status
You can see the toner status.
Arrows
Back
You can scroll through the options available in the selected
menu, and increase or decrease values.
You can go back to the previous screen.
You can select the LCD brightness, language and you can
edit home menu.
Copy
When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying
options (see "Copy" on page 222).
37
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Copy)
Basic Copy
Collation
Layout
Normal
WaterMark
ID Copy
N-Up Copy
N-Up
(Option settings)
Darkness
Original Type
Custom Copy
(Option settings)
(Option settings)
(Option settings)
Darkness
Original Type
Auto Fit Copy
(Option settings)
2-Up
4-Up
ID Copy
Original Orientation
Duplex
Darkness
Original Size
Original Type
Book Copy
Adjust Background
Edge Erase
Off
Duplex
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Size
Original Type
Paper Source
Auto
Darkness
Original Type
Book Copy
(Option settings)
Book Copy
Darkness
Original Size
Original Type
Small Original
Hole Punch
b
Book Center
Border Erase
Stamp
Tray1
a
Tray2
MP Tray
Stamp Activate
Item
Opacity
Position
a. This is an optional feature.
b. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
38
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Scan)
Local PC
Destination
(Option settings)
Duplex
Darkness
Email
To
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
Custom Email
From
PDF Encryption
Digital Signature in PDF
File Policy
To
CC
BCC
Subject
Digital Signature in PDF
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Duplex
Darkness
File Name
Duplex
Darkness
File Name
FTP
(Option settings)
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
(Option settings)
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
Digital Signature in PDF
Duplex
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
Duplex
Shared Folder
Destination
(Option settings)
Original Size
(Option settings)
Darkness
PDF Encryption
Digital Signature in PDF
Duplex
Darkness
File Name
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Network PC
Select User
(Option settings)
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Color Mode
File Format
SMB
Destination
(Option settings)
Darkness
PDF Encryption
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
File Name
Digital Signature in PDF
Duplex
Darkness
PDF Encryption
USB
Digital Signature in PDF
File Policy
(Option settings)
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
File Name
a
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
PDF Encryption
Duplex
Darkness
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
WSD
Destination
a. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
39
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Fax)
Memory Send
To
Delayed Send
Start Time
To
Group Dial Send
To
(Option settings)
(Option settings)
(Option settings)
Darkness
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
Darkness
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
Darkness
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
On Hook Dial
To
Redial
To
Speed Dial Send
To
(Option settings)
(Option settings)
Darkness
Darkness
(Option settings)
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
Darkness
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
40
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Setup)
Fax Setup
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Reports
Configuration
Fax Confirmation
Image TCR
Send Forward
Copy Default
Scan Default
Demo Page
Help List
Receive Forward
Toll Save
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Fax Default
Network Configuration
Supplies Information
Usage Counter
Junk Fax Setup
Secure Receive
Prefix Dial
Stamp Received Name
ECM Mode
Receive Start Code
DRPD Mode
Paper Source
Duplex Print
Scan to Cloud Default
Program Management
Paper Setup
b
Account
Tray1
Fax Setup Wizard
Fax Received
Fax Sent
Fax Schedule Jobs
Fax Send Confirmation
Junk Fax
Email Sent
PCL Font
PS Font
EPSON Font
Address Book
a
Modem Speed
Tray2
c
MP Tray
Margin
Dial Mode
Ring to Answer
Receive Mode
Manual TX/RX
Redial Term
Tray Behavior
Auto Tray Switch
Paper Substitution
Auto Continue
Tray Protection
Address Book
Phone Book
Email
Redial Times
Print
Delete All
a. This is an optional feature.
b. This is only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.
c. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
41
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Setup)
Network Setup
TCP/IP(IPv4)
TCP/IP(IPv6)
Ethernet
Resolution
Clear Text
Edge Enhance
Auto CR
Toner Status Alert
Change Admin Password
Firmware Upgrade
Image Overwrite
Imaging Unit Low Alert
Firmware Version
PDF Type
Application
802.1x
Protocol Management
HTTP
Skip Blank Pages
Emulation
Paper Source
Initial Setup
Machine ID & Fax Number
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Select Country
Language
Default Mode
Sound/Volume
Power Save
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Job Timeout
Held Job Timeout
Altitude Adjustment
Import Setting
Export Setting
Default Paper Size
Application Management
Install New Application
Troubleshooting
a
WINS
SNMPv1/v2
SNTP
UPnP(SSDP)
mDNS
SetIP
Paper jam in MP Tray
Paper jam in Tray 1
Paper jam in Tray 2
Jam inside machine
Jam in exit area
CLR Empty Msg.
Image Management
b
Adim Setup
User Access Control
Authentication
Card Registration
Stamp
Jam inside of duplex
Original paper jam
SLP
Network Configuration
Clear Settings
Print Setup
Orientation
Duplex
Language
Stamp Activate
Item
Opacity
Position
Secure Release
Max Job Count per User
Smart Release
Release Mode
Copies
a. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
b. You need to enter a password to enter this menu. The default password is sec00000.
42
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
(Job Status)
(Eco)
(USB)
(Document Box)
(see "USB" on page 253)
File Policy
System Boxes
Current Job
Eco-On
Eco-Off
Settings
Print From
Complete Job
Duplex
Stored Print
Secured Print
Shared Folder
(Option
settings)
Darkness
File Name
Default Mode
Copies
On
Off
File Manage
(Option settings)
Auto Fit
Duplex
(Option settings)
Copies
a
Paper Source
On-Forced
Format
Delete
Auto Fit
Duplex
Scan to USB
Feature Configuration
Default
Show Space
(Option
settings)
Paper Source
Custom
Copy Settings
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
PC Dirver Print
Settings
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
Digital Signature in
PDF
a. If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings >
Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status.
43
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
a
(Scan to Cloud)
(Secure Release )
Google Drive
Stored Job
(Option settings)
Card
Dropbox
Evernote
ID/PW
PIN
a. You can change the default login window from the SyncThru™ Web Service.
44
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Machine’s basic settings
Select
panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control
1
2
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
OR
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
For the model with a touch screen, select
Setup >Next > Initial Setup on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine
Select the option you want, then press OK.
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings.
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want, go to step 4.
•
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:
panel.
•
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay
fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are
not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
•
•
•
•
•
Month = 01 to 12
Day = 01 to 31
Year = requires four digits
Hour = 01 to 12
Minute = 00 to 59
•
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
45
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Machine’s basic settings
•
•
•
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use
this feature to save power.
When you press the
(Power / Wake Up) button, start printing, or a fax is
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
•
Altitude Adjustment: Print quality is affected by atmospheric
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of
the machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on
Select the option you want, then press OK.
3
4
Press OK to save the selection.
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
Press
ready mode.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
5
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.
•
•
46
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
3
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
•
•
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
2
Make sure not to use the photo paper with this machine. It could cause
damage to the machine.
1
•
•
Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
3
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
1
2
3
Tray extend lever
Paper length guide
Paper width guide
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
47
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
The duplex unit is preset to Letter/LGL or A4 size, depending on your country. To
change the paper size, adjust the guide as shown below.
Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.
1
2
1 Full
2 Empty
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
48
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
4
Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate
them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to
2
Loading paper in the tray
1
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on
the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view"
2
Tray 1 / optional tray
Pull out the paper tray.
1
3
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
3
49
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and
paper length guide.
Insert the tray back into the machine.
4
5
2
1
3
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
•
•
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
6
Multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray
•
Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on
the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view"
The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of
print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media
50
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
M387x/ M407x series
Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray
•
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
•
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other
types of print media.
2
•
•
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print
1
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
Load the paper.
2
Press the push-release of multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray and it
down to open.
1
•
M337x series
51
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
5
Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides
and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much,
or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
3
Printing on special media
The table below shows the special media usable in tray.
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode)> Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.
•
•
When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
When papers overlap when printing using multi-purpose (or manual
feeder) tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try
printing again.
•
•
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
4
To see for paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
52
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Envelope
Multi-purpose (or
manual feeder) tray
a
Types
Tray 1
Optional tray
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
Plain
Thick
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thicker
Thin
●
●
●
●
Bond
Color
CardStock
Labels
●
●
Transparency
Envelope
Preprinted
Cotton
Recycled
Archive
●
●
●
●
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
53
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
•
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, creases, or black bold lines, open
the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever on the right side about 90
degrees and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1
2
Acceptable
Unacceptable
1
•
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
1
Pressure lever
•
•
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
•
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
2
-
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m otherwise; jams may occur.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
-
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine
during operation.
•
•
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
54
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.
Transparency
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in
laser printers.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
•
•
•
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
•
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature
about 170°C (338°F).
•
•
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
•
•
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
-
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
55
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
Preprinted paper
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
•
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
•
•
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
•
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
•
•
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
•
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
56
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
6
Press OK to save the selection.
3
4
Setting the paper size and type
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the Paper
tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or
1
2
Paper Type on the control panel.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
> Next > Paper Setup > select a tray > Paper Size or Paper Type on the
touch screen.
(Setup)> Machine Setup
Select the tray and the option you want.
57
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
7
•
•
If more than 50 pages (one-sided) of Legal paper is stacked in the output
tray, paper can be mis-aligned or paper jams can occur. Do not let paper
to stack up in the output tray.
Using the output support
When printing on thick paper, paper may not properly align on the
output support. Close the output support or turn the paper over in the
tray before printing.
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support.
58
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
8
9
Preparing originals
Loading originals
•
•
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper
jam, low print quality and machine damage.
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on
the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view"
-
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
Coated paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Torn paper
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
•
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
•
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
59
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Lift and open the scanner lid.
Close the scanner lid.
1
3
•
•
•
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and
toner consumption.
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 111).
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with
the scanner lid open.
•
•
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall
on your hands and get hurt.
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
•
Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
2
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder (or duplex automatic document feeder (DADF), you
2
can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m , 21 lbs bond) for one job.
60
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
1
3
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on
the document input tray.
2
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout.
61
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
3
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
10
Printing
•
•
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
Advanced Guide (see "Software Installation" on page 168).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
Open the document you want to print.
1
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
Select Print from the File menu.
4
5
2
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
62
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
11
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
) in the Windows task bar.
(
•
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
button on the control panel.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
63
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
12
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
Opening printing preferences
•
•
The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use.
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark
option but it is not recommended, and an
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
or . An
mark means you can select that certain
mark means you cannot
Open the document you want to print.
1
2
3
4
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
Click Properties or Preferences.
•
•
You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 324).
64
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Using a favorite setting
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.To delete saved
settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
13
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
1
Using help
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
2
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
Click Save.
3
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
4
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
5
65
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
14
Setting Eco mode on the control panel
Eco printing
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, Eco mode is enabled. The
default setting of Eco mode is duplex printing (long edge), multiple pages per
side (2-up), skip blank pages, and toner save. Some features may not be
available depending on model.
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings
1
2
on the control panel. Or press the Eco button on the control panel.
OR
•
•
Double-sided printing (long edge) feature is only available for duplex
For the model with a touch screen, select
on the touch screen.
(Eco) > Settings > Next
Depending on the printer driver you use, skip blank pages may not work
properly. If skip blank pages feature does not work properly, set the
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the Eco mode.
-
-
Off: Set the Eco mode off.
You can set the eco value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program.
On: Set the Eco mode on.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
If you set the Eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the On force
message appears. You have to enter the password to change the Eco mode
status.
66
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
•
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service
Eco options
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you
must set the eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).
•
•
•
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.
None: Disables Eco mode.
Eco Printing: Enables Eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to
-
Select Template
use.
▪
Default Settings: The machine is set to Default Settings
mode.
•
Passcode: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to
enter the password to change the status.
▪
Custom Settings: Change any necessary values.
Passcode button: You can set from SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the password button is activated. To
change the print settings, click on this button, enter the password or need
to contact the administrator.
Press OK to save the selection.
3
4
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
Result simulator
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
Setting Eco mode on the driver
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
•
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.
•
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the Eco mode is currently enabled.
), that
67
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
•
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption of this machine.
Starting secure printing from the SyncThru™ Web
Service
•
The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may
differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media
size, job complexity, etc.
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
15
Click Login on the upper right of SyncThru™ Web Service website (see
2
Secure printing
Settings > Machine Settings > System > RAM Disk.
3
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Enable RAM Disk.
4
You might not be able to print a complex document using the RAM Disk.
Install an optional memory to print a complex document.
This features may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can
protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the
secure printing feature.
Printing secure documents from the control panel
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on
68
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Select
panel.
(Menu) > Job Management > Secured Job on the control
1
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Document Box) > System
Boxes > Next > Secured Print on the touch screen.
Select the document to print.
2
3
4
Enter the password that you set from the printer driver.
Print or delete the document.
69
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Press
(Start).
5
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
(Stop
or Stop/Clear) button and the copying will stop.
16
17
Basic copy
Changing the settings for each copy
Select
Or select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
1
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and
easily make a copy.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Copy) > Basic Copy.
•
If you press the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the
copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will
be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will
automatically return to their default status after the machine completes
the copy in progress.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
3
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
If you want to customize the copy settings including reduce/enlarge,
darkness, original type, and more by using the control panel (see
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
For the model with a touch screen, press
select the option you want > (back).
(Option settings) >
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
4
70
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Darkness
Original Type
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document for the current copy job.
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on
1
2
1
control panel. Or press Darkness on the control panel.
the control panel. Or select
Type on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original
OR
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Copy) >
(Option
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Copy) >
(Option
settings) > Darkness on the touch screen.
settings) > Original Type on the touch screen.
Select the option you want.
Select the option you want .
2
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows.
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows.
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the
darkest.
•
•
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
Press OK to save the selection.
3
4
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
•
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
ready mode.
Press OK to save the selection.
3
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
71
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Press
ready mode.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
Press OK to save the selection.
4
3
4
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
Reduced or enlarged copy
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the
document feeder or scanner glass.
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
(Menu) > Copy Feature >
1
Custom on the control panel. Or select
Reduce/Enlarge> Custom on the control panel.
If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not
available.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Option settings)> Reduce/Enlarge > Custom on the touch
screen.
(Copy) > Custom Copy >
To select from the predefined copy sizes
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge
1
on the control panel. Or select
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.
2
3
Enlarge on the control panel.
Press OK to save the selection.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Copy) > Custom Copy >
(Option settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on the touch screen.
Press
ready mode.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
Select the option you want.
4
2
For the model with a touch screen,select the option you want using
arrows.
72
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Press ID Copy on the control panel. Or select
Feature > Layout > ID Copy on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy
1
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
touch screen.
(Copy) > ID Copy on the
18
ID card copying
Place Front Side Press [Start] appears on the display.
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, follow the instructions on the touch
screen.
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
•
•
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
Press
(Start).
4
Your machine begins scanning the front side.
73
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Place Rear Side Press [Start] appears on the display.
5
•
•
If you do not press the
copied.
(Start) button, only the front side will be
For the model with a touch screen, follow the instructions on the touch
screen.
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
6
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Press
(Start).
7
Your machine begins scanning the back side.
74
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic scanning
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
19
Select the scan destination you want and press OK.
3
Basic Scanning
For the model with a touch screen, press Next > select the scan
destination you want on the touch screen.
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals. This is a basic
scanning method for USB-connected machine.
•
•
You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also
you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different
path.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model.
To change the scan destination go to, Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
some models.
•
If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
Select the option you want and press OK.
4
5
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
2
select the option you want using arrows > Start button on the touch
screen.
Scanning begins.
Select
OR
(scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
For the model with a touch screen, select
touch screen.
(Scan) > Local PC on the
75
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
20
•
Preparing to fax
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to
your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 22). Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a
telephone connection is different from one country to another.
•
•
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more
information ask your internet service provider.
21
We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-
filter.
Sending a fax
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
1
2
3
Line port
Micro filter
DSL modem / Telephone line
Select
OR
(fax) on the control panel.
2
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Fax) > Memory Send >
Next on the touch screen.
76
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
Sending a fax manually
3
Perform the following to send a fax using
panel.
(On Hook Dial) on the control
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
select the option you want using arrows >
touch screen.
(back) > Next on the
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
2
Enter the destination fax number using the number keypad on the
4
5
For the model with a touch screen, press Direct Input or Fax List > enter
the destination fax number using number keypad on the touch screen.
Select
OR
(fax) on the control panel.
Press
(Start) on the control panel.
For the model with a touch screen, select
the touch screen.
(Fax)> On Hook Dial on
For the model with a touch screen, press Send on the touch screen.
The machine starts to scan and send the fax to the destinations.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
3
•
If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 298).
For the model with a touch screen, press
select the option you want using arrows .
(Option settings) >
•
•
When you want to cancel a fax job, press
button before the machine starts transmission.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
Press
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.
4
5
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to
place another page.
For the model with a touch screen, press On Hook on the touch screen.
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel or
77
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
Press
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
6
3
4
signal from the remote fax machine.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
(back) > select the option you want using arrows > Next on the touch
screen.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory.
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using
the
(Address book) button.
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an
option.
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want speed dial
numbers or select a group dial number, go to step 7.
Enter the second fax number and press OK.
5
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 5 and 6.
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the
2
control panel.
OR
•
•
You can add up to 10 destinations.
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial number.
For the model with a touch screen, select
or Group Dial Send on the touch screen.
(Fax) > Speed Dial Send
78
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another
No.? prompt and press OK.
Resolution
7
The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality
fax.
For the model with a touch screen, press Send on the touch screen.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
22
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting (see "Fax" on page 228)
Receiving a fax
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax.
Select
control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the
1
2
OR
23
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Fax) >
(Option
Adjusting the document settings
settings) > Resolution on the touch screen
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s
status to get the best quality.
Select the option you want and press OK.
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows. Press (back) to go back to the previous screen.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
•
•
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals
some models.
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
79
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
•
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
Select
control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the
1
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Fax) >
(Option
•
•
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
settings) > Darkness on the touch screen
When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
Select a darkness level you want.
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows. Press (back) to go back to the previous screen.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
Press
ready mode.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
3
ready mode.7
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default
80
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
25
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
Plugging in a USB memory device
This USB memory device is supported for M387x/ M407x series (see "Various
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and
USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with
FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.
24
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
About USB memory
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector.
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give
you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and
videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or
move.
A
B
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
•
•
•
•
•
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device
Print data stored on a USB memory device
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
Format the USB memory device
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
Check the available memory space
81
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory
device.
•
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation
or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does
not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.
•
If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it.
For details about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory
device.
26
Scanning to a USB memory device
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Scanning
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
82
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Select
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel.
3
Some features may not be available depending on model.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Scan) > USB > Next >
•
•
•
•
Original Size: Sets the image size.
Start on the touch screen.
Original Type: Sets the original document’s.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
The machine begins scanning.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device
from the machine.
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in File Format.
4
•
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color
Mode.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB
job.
•
•
Duplex: Sets the duplex mode.
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.
Select
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
1
2
control panel.
Select the desired status you want and press OK.
3
OR
For the model with a touch screen, press
previous screen. Go to step 5.
(back) to go back to the
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Direct USB) > Scan to USB
>
(Option settings) on the touch screen.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.
4
5
Select the setting option you want appears.
Press
ready mode.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows.
83
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
27
To print a document from a USB memory device
Printing from a USB memory device
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB > USB Print on the control panel.
1
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File is supported by Direct Print option.
OR
•
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
For the model with a touch screen, select
> Next on the touch screen.
(Direct USB) > Print From
Select the folder or file you want and press OK. If you see [+] or [D] in the
front of a folder name, there are one or more files or folders in the
selected folder.
2
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
For the model with a touch screen, select the folder or file you want.
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.
•
•
•
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
3
4
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file. After printing
the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
For the model with a touch screen, press Print on the touch screen. Go
to step 6.
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.
5
6
Otherwise, press the arrows to select No and press OK.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
84
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
28
Restoring data
Backing up data
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
the USB memory port.
1
2
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure
or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them
as backup files on a USB memory device.
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Import
Setting on the control panel.
OR
Backing up data
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup)> Machine Setup
> Next > Initial Setup > Import Setting on the touch screen.
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
1
Select Setup Data, Address Book.
3
4
5
6
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Export Setting
2
Select the file you want to restore.
on the control panel.
OR
Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears.
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
> Next > Initial Setup > Export Setting on the touch screen.
ready mode.
Select Setup Data or Address Book .
3
4
5
6
29
Select the file you want to back up.
Managing USB memory
Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears.
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at
once by reformatting the device.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
85
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Formatting a USB memory device
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files
or folders in the selected folder.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
1
Select Direct USB > File Manage > Format on the control panel.
2
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be
restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before
deleting it.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Direct USB) > File
Manage > Next > select the folder or file you want >
(Option
settings) > Format on the touch screen.
Deleting an image file
Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears.
3
4
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
1
ready mode.
Press Direct USB > File Manage > Delete on the control panel.
2
OR
Viewing the USB memory status
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Direct USB) > File
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving
documents.
Manage > Next > select the folder or file you want >
(Option
settings) > Delete on the touch screen.
Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears.
3
4
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
86
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
1
Select Direct USB > File Manage > Check Space on the control panel.
2
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Direct USB) > Show
Space > Next on the touch screen.
The available memory space appears on the display.
3
4
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
ready mode.
87
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
•
•
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
89
3. Maintenance
Available consumables
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
a
Type
Part name
Average yield
Approx. 3,000 pages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series: MLT-D203S
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series: MLT-D204S
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series: MLT-D203L
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series: MLT-D204L
M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series: MLT-D203E
M3875/ M4075 series: MLT-D204E
M4070/ M4072 series: MLT-D203U
M4075 series: MLT-D204U
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series: MLT-R204
Approx. 5,000 pages
Approx. 10,000 pages
Approx. 15,000 pages
Toner cartridge
Approx. 30,000 pages
Imaging unit
(Based on 3 average letter/A4 size pages for print job)
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner
cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific
country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine
Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine’s
warranty.
90
3. Maintenance
Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 8).
Accessory
Memory module
Optional tray
Function
Extends your machine’s memory capacity.
Part name
ML-MEM370: 512 MB
a
•
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series: SL-
If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems, you can attach an additional 520
sheet tray.
SCF3800
•
•
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series: SL-SCF3805
IEEE 1284B parallel Allows you to use various interface.
ML-PAR100
b
Connector
•
When installing the printer driver with an IEEE1284B parallel connector, the
machine might not be found and after installing the printer driver, only basic
printing features are available.
•
•
If you want to check the machine's status or set the settings, connect the
machine to a computer with a USB cable or a network.
If you use the IEEE 1284B parallel connector, you can not use the USB cable.
2
a. Plain paper 80 g/m (20 lb bond).
b. To use the optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector, plug it to the UBS port and the 5V output port.
91
3. Maintenance
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to
-
An environment with salty air.
1
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new
Samsung toner cartridge.
Handling instructions
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner
cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation
– if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge
with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
•
•
•
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge
properly.
2
Toner cartridge usage
•
•
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
were installed in the machine.
•
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight or room light.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
92
3. Maintenance
Storing the toner cartridge
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
93
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
•
•
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.
The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display.
The computer’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
IlIllustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
•
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
94
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
4
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series
95
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
5
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series
96
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life:
•
•
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when the toner cartridge should be replaced.
The computer's Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status"
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 90).
•
•
Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
•
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
97
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
6
Toner cartridge
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series
1
2
98
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series
1
2
99
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
8
9
Precautions
Setting Device Options
•
Disconnect the power cord
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
2
•
•
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to
the instructions.
•
•
For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Right-click your machine.
3
4
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context
menus, select the Printer properties.
101
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
•
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
-
-
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
Select Device Options.
5
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
Select the appropriate option.
•
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
6
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
7
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
•
•
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
102
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
10
Upgrading a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine
Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's.
The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 91).
After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer
properties window. You can control the active job queue and file policy (see "Using optional device features" on page 309).
1
2
1
2
103
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
2
1
2
1
104
3. Maintenance
Monitoring the supplies life
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
•
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 32).
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
Select
OR
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.
1
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Report > Supplies Information on the touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, press Yes when the confirmation windows appears.
Press (Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home ( ) icon to return to ready mode.
105
3. Maintenance
Setting the toner low alert
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not
this message or LED appears.
•
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 32).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Select
OR
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Toner Low Alert on the control panel.
1
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen.
Select the option you want.
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(back) to save the selection.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready mode.
4
106
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
•
•
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
11
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
107
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
12
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
•
•
Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
•
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
108
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
1
109
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
13
Cleaning the pickup roller
•
•
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
1
2
2
1
110
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
14
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
•
•
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
Lift and open the scanner lid.
1
2
111
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.
3
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
Document feeder glass
White bar
Close the scanner lid.
4
112
3. Maintenance
Tips for moving & storing your machine
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
•
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.
113
3. Maintenance
4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.If you
cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in
User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 47).
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix papers in a tray.
Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
115
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
1
In tray1
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
116
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
2
In optional tray
•
•
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Various features" on page 10).
117
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
118
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
M387x/ M407x series
120
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
4
Inside the machine
The Fuser area is HOT, please wait until device cools down before accessing this area. Turn power off to cool the machine down. Take care when removing paper
from the machine.
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
121
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
M3370/ M3870/ M4070/ M4072 series
122
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
M3375/ M3875/ M4075 series
1
2
2
1
123
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
125
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1
1
2
127
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
Original paper jam in front of scanner
•
•
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Various features" on page 10).
129
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
Original paper jam inside of scanner
•
•
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Various features" on page 10).
130
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
131
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
•
•
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21).
132
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing jams
Original paper jam in scanner duplex path
•
•
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model (supported duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (see "Various features" on page 10).
2
1
133
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
•
•
•
•
Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 23).
To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 324).
If the problem persists, call a service representative.
134
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
LED
Status
Off
Description
•
•
The machine is off-line.
The machine is in power save mode.
Blinking
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.
Green
On
•
•
The machine is on-line and can be used.
A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem
is cleared, the machine resumes.
a
Blinking
•
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page
Status
b
94).
Red
•
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
•
•
•
•
The cover is opened. Close the cover.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
On
The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing jams" on page 116).
c
•
An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge
Blinking
On
The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
Blue
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 190).
The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
Wireless
Off
135
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
LED
Status
On
Description
The machine is in power save mode.
(
)
Blue
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.
Power /
Wake Up
Off
On
Off
Eco mode is on (see "Eco printing" on page 66).
Eco mode is off.
Eco
Green
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 23).
c. When the imaging unit has reached its end of life, the machine will stop printing. In this case, you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru™Web Service (Settings > Machine
Settings > System > Setup > Supplies Management> Imaging Unit Stop) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > System > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit Stop).
Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device’s system.
136
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
8
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
Paper Jam-related messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s
Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
•
Original paper jam
inside of scanner.
Remove jam
document has
jammed in
•
•
•
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
document feeder.
When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
•
•
•
Paper Jam in tray 1
Paper Jam in tray 2
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the model
or optional goods
•
•
•
•
•
[error number] indicates the error number.
[tray type] indicates the tray number.
[media type] indicates the media type.
[media size] indicates the media size.
[unit type] indicates the unit type.
in the multi-
purpose tray.
•
in inside the
machine.
•
•
Jam in exit area
in the paper exit
area.
137
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
9
Message
Replace IMG. unit The indicated
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• You can choose Stop or
•
Toner-related messages
Continue as shown on the
control panel. If you select Stop,
the printer stops printing and
you cannot print any more
without changing the imaging
unit. If you select Continue, the
printer keeps printing but the
printing quality cannot be
guaranteed.
Replace the imaging unit for the
best print quality when this
message appears. Using a
imaging unit beyond this stage
can result in printing quality
issues (see "Replacing the
imaging unit has
almost reached its
estimated imaging
unit life.
Replace with new
imaging unit
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
•
Error [error number] A toner cartridge is Reinstall the toner cartridge.
Toner Cart Failure:
[error number]
Call for service
not installed.
A toner cartridge is Reinstall the toner cartridge two or
not being detected three times to confirm it is seated
properly. If the problem persists,
Error [error number]
Toner Failure: [error
number]
Install toner again
contact the service representatives.
Remove the protective film from
Not removed
protective film from the toner cartridge.
toner.
•
•
Toner not installed
Toner cartridge is
not installed.
Install it
IMG. Not
Compatible
Imaging unit is not not for your
compatible.
Check guide
IMG. Not Installed The imaging unit is Reinstall the imaging unit two or
Imaging unit is not
installed.
Install the unit.
Prepare IMG. unit
•
If the machine stops printing,
replace the imaging unit (see
The imaging unit
you have installed is unit, designed for your machine.
Install a Samsung-genuine imaging
machine.
•
Toner Not
compatible
The indicated toner Install the corresponding toner
cartridge is not
Toner cartridge is suitable for your
cartridge with a Samsung-genuine
•
•
not installed.
three times. If the problem persists,
call for service.
not compatible.
Check guide
machine.
The estimated
Prepare a new imaging unit for
Prepare new
imaging unit
138
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Prepare a new cartridge for a
replacement. You may temporarily
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung cartridge
such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-
genuine Samsung cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of
using non-genuine Samsung cartridges will not be covered under the
machine warranty.
•
Prepare new toner Small amount of
Prepare new toner
cartridge
toner is left in the
indicated cartridge. increase the printing quality by
The estimated
redistributing the toner (see
a
cartridge life of
toner is close.
•
Replace new toner The indicated toner • You can choose Stop or
10
Continue as shown on the
cartridge has almost
reached its
estimated cartridge
life.
Replace with new
toner cartridge
control panel. If you select Stop,
the printer stops printing. If you
select Continue, the printer
keeps printing but the printing
quality cannot be guaranteed.
Tray-related messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Replace the toner cartridge for
the best print quality when this
message appears. Using a
cartridge beyond this stage can
result in printing quality issues
•
•
Output bin full
Output bin full.
Remove printed paper
The output tray is full. Removepapersfromthe
output tray, the printer
resumes printing.
All Tray Empty
Paper is empty in all
tray.
There is no paper in all Load paper in tray (see
tray.
The indicated toner Replace the toner cartridge (see
Load paper
cartridge has
reached its
estimated cartridge
life
page 97).
•
•
Paper Empty in tray 1
Paper is empty in tray 1.
Load paper
There is no paper in
tray.
Load paper in tray (see
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge, which indicates the
average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of
pages may be affected by the percentage of image area, operating environment, printing
interval, media type and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even
when red LED is turns on and the printer stops printing.
Paper Empty in tray 2
Paper is empty in tray 2.
Load paper
139
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
12
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Misc. messages
•
Paper Empty in MP
There is no paper in the Load paper in the multi-
multi-purpose tray.
purpose (or manual
feeder) tray" on page
50).
Paper is empty in MP
tray.
Load paper
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
•
Door is open.
Close it
The front cover or rear
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
•
Tray 2 door is open.
Close it
The tray2 is not
securely latched.
Close the tray2 until it
locks into place.
Scanner door open
Door of scanner is
open.
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
11
Network-related messages
Close the door
•
Not Proper room temp The machine is in a room Move the machine to a
with improper room
temperature.
room with proper
room temperature (see
Not Proper room
temperature.
Change room
temperature
Message
IP Conflict
This IP address conflicts
with that of other
system
Meaning
The network IP address
you have set is being used and reset it if
by someone else.
Suggested solutions
•
•
Check the IP address
necessary (see
•
•
Replace retard roller
Replace with new tray
1 retard roller
The life of the tray
reverse roller has
expired.
Replace the tray
reverse roller with a
new one. Contact the
service
"Printing a network
configuration report"
Replace retard roller
Replace with new tray
2 retard roller
representatives.
802.1x Network Error
802.1x Network Error
Contact the Admin.
Fail to authenticate.
Check the network
authentication
protocol. If the
problem persists,
contact your network
administrator.
•
Replace pickup roller
Replace with new tray
2 pickup roller
The life of the tray pickup Replace the tray pickup
roller will be expired.
roller with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
140
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Replace pickup roller
Replace with new [tray
type] pickup roller
The life of the tray1, tray2 Replace the tray pick-
or MP tray pick-up roller up roller with a new
•
•
•
•
Error: [error number]
Fuser Unit Failure:
[error number]
Turn off then on.
Call for service if the
problem
There is a problem in the Reboot the power. If
fuser unit.
the problem persists,
please call for service.
will expired soon.
one. Contact the
service
representatives.
•
Memory Full
Fax memory is almost
full.
Print or remove
received fax job
The memory is full. No
more fax data can be
received.
Print or remove the
received fax data in the
memory.
Error: [error number]
HDD System Failure:
[error number]
Turn off then on.
Call for service if the
problem
There is a problem in the Reboot the power. If
HDD system.
the problem persists,
please call for service.
•
•
Scanner Locked
Scanner is locked.
Press Stop button
The scanner is locked.
Reboot the power. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Error: [error number]
Motor Failure: [error
number]
Turn off then on.
Call for service if the
problem
There is a problem in the Reboot the power. If
Motor system.
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Scanner door open
Door of scanner is
open.
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
Close the door
•
Memory Full
Fax memory is almost
full.
Print or remove
received fax job
The fax memory is almost Print or remove the
Error: [error number]
LSU Failure: [error
number]
Turn off then on.
Call for service if the
problem
There is a problem in the Reboot the power. If
full.
received fax job in
LSU.
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Secure Receive.
141
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Error: [error number]
There is a problem in the Check the tray2
tray 2. connection.
Input System Failure:
[error number]
Check tray 2
connection
•
Error: [error number]
There is a problem in the Reboot the power. If
video system.
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Video System Failure:
[error number]
Call for service if the
problem persists
142
4. Troubleshooting
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items
Description
a
Width x Length x Height
•
•
M337xFD/ M337xHD/ M387xFD/ M387xHD: 414.6 x 420.6 x 449.1 mm (16.32 x 16.56 x 17.68 inches)
Dimension
M387xFW/M407xFR/ M407xHR/ M407xFX: 469 x 444.3 x 482.1 mm (18.46 x 17.49 x 18.98 inches)
•
•
M407xFD: 482 x 410.6 x 449.1 mm (19.02 x 16.17 x 17.68 inches)
M337xFD/ M337xHD/ M387xFD/ M387xHD: 15.15 kg (33.4 Ibs)
Machine with consumables
Weight
•
•
M387xFW/ M407xFD/ M407xFR/ M407xHR: 17.07 kg (37.63 Ibs)
M407xFX: 17.23 kg (37.99 Ibs)
b
Ready mode
Print mode
Less than 26 dB (A)
Noise Level
•
M337x series: Less than 55 dB (A)
•
•
M387x/ M407x series: Less than 57 dB (A)
M337x series: Less than 57 dB (A)
Copy/ Scan Scanner glass
mode
•
•
M387x/ M407x series: Less than 58 dB (A)
M337x series: Less than 57 dB (A)
Document feeder
•
M387x/ M407x series: Less than 58 dB (A)
Temperature
Humidity
Operation
Storage (packed)
10 to 30°C (50 to 86 °F)
-20 to 40°C (-4 to 104 °F)
Operation
Storage (packed)
20 to 80% RH
10 to 90% RH
c
110 volt models
220 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
AC 220 - 240 V
Power rating
144
5. Appendix
Specifications
Items
Description
Power consumption
Average operating mode
Less than 700 W
Ready mode
Less than 10 W (M407xFX: Less than 15 W)
d
•
M337xFD/ M337xHD/ M387xFD/ M387xHD/ M407xFD/ M407xFR/ M407xHR: Less than 1.1 W
Power save mode
•
•
M387xFW: Less than 1.6 W (Wi-Fi Direct on: Less than 2.8 W )
M407xFX: Less than 3.5 W
e
Less than 0.1 W
Power off mode
f
Module
SPW-B4319U
Wireless
a. Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset and other accessories.
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
c. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
d. The power consumption of power save mode may be affected by machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment.
e. Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.
145
5. Appendix
Specifications
2
Print media specifications
a
Print media weight/Capacity
Type
Size
Dimensions
b c
Tray1 / Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
Manual feeder
2
2
2
Plain paper
Letter
Legal
US Folio
A4
Oficio
JIS B5
ISO B5
Executive
A5
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
70 to 85 g/m (19 to 23 lbs 70 to 85 g/m (19 to 23 lbs 70 to 85 g/m (19 to 23 lbs
bond)
bond)
bond)
2
2
2
•
250 sheets of 80 g/m
(20 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets of 80 g/m (20 • 1 sheet of 80 g/m (20 lbs
lbs bond) bond)
2
A6
•
150 sheets of 75 g/m
(20 lbs bond)
2
2
Envelope
Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
Not available in tray1/
optional tray.
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lbs 75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lbs
bond) bond)
Envelope No. 10
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Envelope C6
Refer to the Plain
paper section
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Refer to the Plain paper section
2
2
2
Thick paper
Thicker paper
Thin paper
86 to 105 g/m (23 to 28 lbs 86 to 105 g/m (23 to 28 lbs 86 to 105 g/m (23 to 28 lbs
bond)
Not available in tray1/
optional tray.
bond)
164 to 220 g/m (44 to 58 164 to 220 g/m (44 to 58 lbs
lbs bond) bond)
bond)
2
2
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
2
2
2
Refer to the Plain
paper section
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs 60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs 60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs
bond)
bond)
bond)
146
5. Appendix
Specifications
a
Print media weight/Capacity
Type
Size
Dimensions
b c
Tray1 / Optional tray
Not available in tray1/
optional tray.
Multi-purpose tray
Manual feeder
2
2
Transparency
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
138 to 146 g/m (36.81 to 138 to 146 g/m (36.81 to
38.91 lbs bond)
38.91 lbs bond)
d
2
2
Letter, Legal, US Folio, Refer to the Plain paper section
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Not available in tray1/
optional tray.
Labels
120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 lbs
lbs bond) bond)
Executive, A5
2
2
2
Card stock
Letter, Legal, US Folio, Refer to the Plain paper section
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs
lbs bond)
lbs bond)
bond)
Executive, A5
2
2
2
Bond paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
e f
Refer to the Plain paper section
106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs
lbs bond)
lbs bond)
bond)
2
•
Multi-purpose(or manual
feeder) tray: 76 x 127 mm (2.99 x
5 inches)
Minimum size (custom) ,
•
•
Multi-purpose(or manual feeder) tray: 60 to 220 g/m (16 to 58 lbs bond)
2
Tray 1/ Tray 2: 60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43 lbs bond)
•
Tray 1/ Tray 2: 105 x 148.5 mm
(4.13 x 5.85 inches)
Maximum size (custom)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
b. M337x series only.
c. 1 sheet for manual feeder.
d. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
e. The paper types available in multi-purpose tray: Plan, Thick, Thicker, Thin, Cotton, Colored, Pre-printed, Recycled, Envelope, Transparency, Labels, Cardstock, Bond, Archive
f. The paper types available in tray 1: Plan, Thick, Thin, Recycled, Cardstock, Bond, Archive
147
5. Appendix
Specifications
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
RAM
128 MB (256 MB)
128 MB (512 MB)
512 MB (2 GB)
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB (2 GB)
free HDD space
1.5 GB
®
®
®
Windows XP
®
®
®
1.25 GB to 2 GB
10 GB
Windows Server 2003
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
®
®
®
Windows Server 2008
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
®
®
®
15 GB
Windows Vista
Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz
®
®
®
16 GB
Windows 7
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
®
•
•
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
®
®
®
512 MB (2 GB)
1 GB (2 GB)
10 GB
16 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
®
®
®
Windows 8
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
®
•
•
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
148
5. Appendix
Specifications
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
Operating system
CPU
RAM
Free HDD space
®
Mac OS X 10.5
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
•
Intel processors
•
•
•
867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
®
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.8
1 GB (2 GB)
2 GB
1 GB
4 GB
Intel processors
®
Intel processors
Linux
Items
Operating system
Requirements
®
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5, 6 (32/ 64 bit)
Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 (32/ 64 bit)
®
OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 (32/ 64 bit)
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04, 10.10, 11.04 (32/ 64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/ 64 bit)
Debian 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 (32/ 64 bit)
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
512 MB (1 GB)
CPU
RAM
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
149
5. Appendix
Specifications
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 8).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items
Network interface
Specifications
•
•
Ethernet 10/100/100 Base-TX Wired Lan
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
•
•
®
®
®
®
®
®
Network operating system
Network protocols
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista , Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2
•
•
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.8
•
•
UNIX OS
TCP/IPv4
•
•
•
•
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD, AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, ThinPrint
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
•
•
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, Standard TCP/IP Printing, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA-Enterprise/ Personal, WPA2-Enterprise/Personal
Wireless security
•
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
151
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
6
Ozone safety
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
152
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
7
9
Mercury Safety
Recycling
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
8
10
Power saver
China only
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
襦愤縑趀爮闭
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
賉帞
縑趀绌裎 術賉縑聱ꢀポM9śJマ
3UR;SUHVVꢀ0ꢁꢁꢂꢃ+'
3UR;SUHVVꢀ0ꢁꢇꢂꢃ+'
3UR;SUHVVꢀ0ꢈꢉꢂꢃ+5
3UR;SUHVVꢀ0ꢈꢉꢂꢃ);
蜷筨愤竖爮襔ꢀ*%ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢂꢄꢅꢁꢆꢇꢆ
ꢄ
ꢄ
ꢄ
ꢄ
ꢄꢅꢆꢂ
ꢄꢅꢇꢈ
ꢄꢅꢊꢃ
ꢋꢅꢃꢆ
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
153
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
11
(The United States of America only)
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
(Applicable in countries with separate collection
systems)
12
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (USA
Only)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
13
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
Taiwan only
154
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
14
•
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Radio frequency emissions
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Canadian radio interference regulations
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
155
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
15
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
United States of America
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
16
Russia only
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
156
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
17
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
Germany only
18
Turkey only
21
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
19
Thailand only
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
1
2
the date and time of transmission
identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
20
3
telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
157
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
22
Ringer Equivalence Number
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
You should also know that:
•
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
158
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
•
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.You cannot rewire
the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
•
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
Important warning:
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
23
•
•
•
Green and Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
159
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
EC Certification
24
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
Approvals and Certifications
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [M337x/ M387x/
M407x series] is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
160
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
25
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Israel only
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
26
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark is on the
system label.
Regulatory compliance statements
Wireless guidance
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
161
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless
communication.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
162
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
27
China only
163
5. Appendix
Copyright
© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
•
•
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7/8, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
•
•
•
•
Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 2.04
164
5. Appendix
User’s Guide
ADVANCED
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on windows.
1. Software Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 178).
•
•
If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see
Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).
Installation for Mac
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
click Continue.
1
10
11
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
2
If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and
add it to your fax list
After the installation is finished, click Close.
12
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
4
5
6
7
8
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Enter the password and click OK.
9
169
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software
Uninstaller.
1
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
2
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
3
Enter the password and click OK.
4
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
5
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
170
1. Software Installation
Installation for Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
Support or Downloads).
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon
and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you
have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your
system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified
Driver Configurator or Image Manager.
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package
to your computer.
3
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.
4
Double click cdroot > autorun.
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
7
171
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
Open the Terminal program. When the Terminal screen appears, type in
the following.
3
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/[root@localhost
uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
Click Next.
4
Click Finish.
5
172
1. Software Installation
2. Using a Network-
Connected Machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
• AirPrint
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
Useful network programs
2
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
•
•
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
1
3
SyncThru™ Web Service
SetIP wired network setup
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
•
•
Check the supplies information and status.
Customize machine settings.
•
•
•
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
•
•
The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22).
•
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
174
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
4
For example:
Printing a network configuration report
•
•
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address: 169.254.192.192
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
5
Setting IP address
•
•
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22).
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
•
•
The machine has a display screen: Press the
(Menu) button on the
control panel and select Network > Network Configuration.
The machine has a touch screen: Press
(Setup) on the touch screen >
The following instructions may differ for your model.
Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Network Configuration.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
175
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and
install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads).
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)
1
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
3
Turn on the machine.
4
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
1
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
5
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
Click the
window.
icon in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration
6
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
4
5
6
7
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
176
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)
8
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Preferences or Administrator.
Enter the password and click OK.
9
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
10
Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
Select Network Connected Printer (Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Set IP Address button.
1
11
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
2
Click the
window.
icon in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration
12
13
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
3
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
4
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report.
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
5
14
177
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
•
•
•
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22).
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.For windows, select the printer
driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.
178
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
6
window. Then, click Next.
Windows
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Then, click Next.
4
5
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
1
2
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
•
The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
•
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the
Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows
Store.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
a From Charms, select Search.
b Click Store.
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
•
•
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
3
179
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
1
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
2
3
Click Add a device.
Command- line
/s or
/S
Definition
Description
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
Starts silent installation.
Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs or
user intervention.
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
4
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
5
Silent installation Mode
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
180
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
Definition
Description
Command- line
Definition
Description
/p”<port name>” or Specifies printer port.
/P”<port name>”
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name, IEEE1284 port name or
network path.
/a”<dest_path>” or Specifies destination path
Since machine drivers should
be installed on the OS specific
location, this command
applies to only application
software.
for installation.
/A”<dest_path>”
Network Port will be
created by use of
Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified path.
For example:
•
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
/n”<Printer name>” Specifies printer name.
With this parameter, you can
add printer instances as your
or
Printer instance shall be
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
created as specified printer wishes.
name.
/N”<Printer name>”
•
/
/nd or
/ND
Commands not to set the
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default
machine driver.
It indicates installed machine
p"\\computer_name\share
d_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\shared
_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" means the network
path to the printer by
entering two slashes, the
computer name or local IP
address of the PC sharing
the printer, and then the
share name of the printer.
machine driver on your system
if there are one or more printer
drivers installed. If there is no
installed machine driver on
your system, then this option
won’t be applied because
Windows OS will set installed
printer driver as a default
machine driver.
181
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
/x or
Definition
Description
Command- line
Definition
Description
Uses existing machine
This command provides a way
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage.
driver files to create printer to install a printer instance
/X
instance if it is already
installed.
that uses installed printer
driver files without installing
an additional driver.
7
Mac
/up”<printer
name>” or
Removes only specified
printer instance and not the to remove only specified
This command provides a way
driver files.
printer instance from your
system without effecting
other printer drivers. It will not
remove printer driver files
from your system.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
/UP”<printer
name>”
1
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
/d or
/D
Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all
and applications from your installed device drivers and
system.
application software from
your system.
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
and add other available
/V”<share name>”
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
platform drivers for Point & machine drivers to system and
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Print.
share it with specified <share
name> for point and print.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
4
5
6
/o or
/O
Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open
folder after installation.
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
182
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
8
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
7
Linux
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
8
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
Support or Downloads).
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Enter the password and click OK.
9
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Continue.
Install the Linux driver and add network printer
10
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
1
11
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website.
Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
2
12
13
14
Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
3
Double-click the cdroot > autorun.
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
4
The Samsung installer window opens. Click Next.
5
The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software
and your machine name in Print Using.
6
15
Select network printer and click Search button.
7
Click Add.
16
17
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
8
After the installation is finished, click Close.
Select your machine and click Next.
9
183
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
9
Input the printer description and Next.
10
UNIX
After the machine is added, click Finish.
11
When installation is done, click Finish.
12
•
•
•
Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 8).
The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
Add a network printer
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
1
Click Add Printer.
2
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
product > Support or Downloads).
The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
3
Select Network printer and click the Search button.
4
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
5
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
Select your machine and click Next.
6
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
Enter the printer description and click Next.
7
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
Driver package to your computer.
After the machine is added, click Finish.
1
8
Acquire root privileges.
2
“su -”
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
3
184
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
4
“accept <printer_name>”
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
“enable <printer_name>”
the unpacked directory.
5
6
Uninstalling the printer driver package
Run the install script.
“./install –i”
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
7
8
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
185
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Setting up the printer
11
12
Click OK to add the printer.
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
Type the name of the printer.
1
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
2
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
3
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
4
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
5
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
6
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
7
OS.
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
8
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
9
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
10
186
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
10
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
From the control panel
Activating IPv6
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
some models.
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with
Select
control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Protocol on the
FE80).
1
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network
OR
router.
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup)> Machine Setup
•
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
> Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Protocol on the touch
screen.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
Select On and press OK.
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, select On using arrows on the touch
screen.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
187
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
Select
the control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on
1
2
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We
recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
> Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the
touch screen
(Setup) > Machine Setup
DHCPv6 address configuration
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following
options for default dynamic host configuration.
Press OK to select the required value you want.
For the model with a touch screen, select the option you want using
arrows and press
(back) to save the selection.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
•
•
•
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Always Use: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Never Use: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
188
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
11
•
•
You can also set the DHCPv6.
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A
through F).
Activating IPv6
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and
1
IPv6 address configuration
press the Enter key or click Go.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2
1
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
2
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address
starts with FE80).
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
3
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.
Click the Apply button.
•
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
4
5
6
7
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
3
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
189
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Wireless network name and network password
•
Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation.
•
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
12
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the
machine at a time.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.
190
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
13
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.
Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country (see "Features by models" on page 8).
Set up method
With Access Point
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 196.
From the machine’s control panel
•
•
Without Access Point
From the computer
Wi-Fi Direct setup
Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 199.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 204.
•
•
If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 211).
It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Access Points, they might be exposed to illegal access
from unknown machines including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user' guide for password settings.
191
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
14
Choosing your type
Using the WPS button
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by
using the
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
•
•
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-
Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
Items to prepare
•
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
•
•
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
Networked computer (PIN mode only)
192
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Machines with a display screen
5
Connecting in PBC mode
Connecting in PIN mode
Select
panel.
(Menu) > Network > Wi-Fi > WPS Setting on the control
Select
panel.
(Menu) > Network > Wi-Fi > WPS Setting on the control
1
1
OR
OR
For models that have the
(WPS) button on the control panel, press
For models that have the
(WPS) button on the control panel, press
and hold the
seconds.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2
and hold the
seconds.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 4
Press PBC (or Connect via PBC).
Press PIN (or Connect via PIN).
2
3
2
3
4
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing
time.
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
4
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a
b
c
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
a
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
b
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
c
SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.
AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
193
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
Connecting in PIN mode
5
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Machines without a display screen
Connecting in PBC mode
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
1
In ready mode, press and hold the
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button on
Press and hold the
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than
2
3
Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4
1
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the
access point (or wireless router).
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-
digit PIN.
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
2
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
4
194
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Re-connecting to a network
Disconnecting from a network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the
the control panel for more than two seconds.
(WPS) button on
•
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
•
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS
•
•
The machine is turned off and on again.
The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
LED turns off.
15
Canceling the connection process
Using the menu button
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
the wireless network, press and release the
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) on the
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on model or
optional goods. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu
control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless
network.
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
195
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the
Items to prepare
•
•
•
•
•
Access point
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Press the
on the control panel.
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > WLAN Settings button
1
2
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.
•
•
Wizard (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The
machine will display a list of available networks from which to
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key.
Creating the infrastructure network
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
1
, or choose the security option in detail.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2
16
Setup using Windows
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
196
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
3
5
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
6
7
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
197
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
When the network connection window appears, disconnect the network
cable. Then, click Next. The network cable connection can interfere with
searching for wireless devices.
8
9
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appears.
(SSID is case-sensitive).
•
•
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
•
•
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
•
•
•
You can also start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 210).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 23 characters.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
198
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
10
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
11
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
Items to prepare
•
For Windows 8,
•
•
•
•
Network-connected computer
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
4
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2
199
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
•
•
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
6
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
8
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
7
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
•
•
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
200
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
9
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
10
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
11
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
17
Setup using Mac
•
•
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
Items to prepare
•
•
•
•
•
Access point
For the Static method
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
201
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Enter the password and click OK.
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
9
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
10
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1
powered on.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
4
5
6
7
8
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
11
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
(SSID is case-sensitive).
•
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
202
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appears.
12
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
•
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
•
•
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
•
•
•
You can also start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 210).
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 23 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
13
203
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished,
click Quit.
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
14
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1
powered on.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Items to prepare
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
•
•
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Enter the password and click OK.
9
204
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
10
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
•
•
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
11
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive).
12
•
•
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
205
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
13
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
14
15
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
•
•
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
18
Using a network cable
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 22).
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
206
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
•
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
•
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
Items to prepare
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
•
•
•
•
•
Access point
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
Network cable
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
Printing a network configuration report
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
status.
207
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
1
7
•
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is
case sensitive.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
2
For example,
•
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
3
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
4
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
5
6
Settings.
Click Next.
8
9
Click Wireless > Wizard.
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
the setup is right, click Apply.
208
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
4
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
10
5
6
19
Click Wireless > Custom.
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
20
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
1
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
2
For example,
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
209
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
-
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used
only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless
network. We recommend using the default local IP address (the default
local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 )
•
You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
•
The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
-
-
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct
group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point.
We recommend activating this option.
•
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 3.
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by
default.
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
From the machine (Machines with a display/touch screen)
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be
used to change Wi-Fi Direct settings.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
Select
control panel.
(Menu) > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Direct > On/Off > On on the
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Mac OS users
only.
Select
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless
•
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings > Network.
> Wi-Fi Direct on the touch screen.
-
-
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your printer on
a wireless network. By default, the device name is the model name.
210
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
From the network-connected computer
•
•
When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
device.
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
•
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.
21
•
For Linux OS users,
Troubleshooting for wireless network
-
-
-
Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
Problems during setup or driver installation
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.
Printers Not Found
•
•
•
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
Setting up the mobile device
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
The machine does not support wireless networking (see "Features by
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone.
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found
211
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try
connecting again.
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
•
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
How to compare:
•
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
a Click the Windows Start menu.
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
•
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB
cable and your machine’s power.
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
•
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
•
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired
network cable from your machine.
For Windows 7/ Windows 8, select Control Panel > Devices and
Printers.
c Right-click your machine.
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.
For Windows 7/ Windows 8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context
menus, select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer
drivers connected with selected printer.
e Click Port tab.
f Click Configure Port.. button.
PC Connection Error
•
The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
-
For a DHCP network environment
212
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network
configuration Sheet.
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network
•
•
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
turned on.
information report's.
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,
connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.
•
•
•
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
-
For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured
to static address.
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
▪
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
try searching for the machine again.
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
▪
▪
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
•
•
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless
router) administrator.
Other problems
•
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
213
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on
the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address
that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the MAC address of your
machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
oven and some Bluetooth devices.
•
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.
•
•
•
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.
•
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not
connect to your machine.
•
•
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use
the wireless machine.
•
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for
Samsung wireless network machines.
•
•
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
•
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
214
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Samsung Mobile Print
22
24
What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Supported Mobile OS
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones
but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a
network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi
access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.
•
•
Android OS 2.1 or higher
iOS 4.0 or higher
25
Supported devices
•
•
iOS 4.0 or higher: iPod Touch, iPhone, iPad
Android 2.1 or higher: Galaxy series and Android mobile devices
23
Downloading Samsung Mobile Print
To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for
“Samsung Mobile Print.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your
computer.
215
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
AirPrint
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If it’s your first time
logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and
password. We recommend you to change the default password for
security reasons.
4
•
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the
box your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.
5
6
Click AirPrint.
You can enable AirPrint.
26
Setting up AirPrint
27
Printing via AirPrint
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
1
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
Touch the action icon(
).
1
2
3
4
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
2
Touch Print button. Print it out.
For example,
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
click the print center icon (
the print center.
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
216
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
5
6
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
28
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
Registering your Google account to the printer
•
•
Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
You should create your Google account in the advance.
7
Enter your printer’s name and description.
Open the Chrome browser.
8
9
1
2
3
4
Click Register.
Visit www.google.com.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
217
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Click Finish printer registration.
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tap the option
Tap the send
button of the document that you want to print.
button.
Click Manage your printers.
11
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
Tap the Cloud Print
button.
Set the printing options if you want.
29
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
Printing from the Chrome browser
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using.
You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™ service.
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
Run Chrome.
1
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Open the document or email that you want to print.
2
Click the wrench icon
in the browser’s top right corner.
3
4
5
6
Printing from an application on mobile device
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
Click the Print button.
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
1
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
218
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Before you begin reading a chapter
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.You can check the features available for each model
•
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
and touch screen.
(Menu)
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
For models that do not have the
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 23).
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
220
3. Useful Setting Menus
Print
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
You can enter the number of print using the number
keypad.
Copies
Sets the resolution option. The higher the setting, the
sharper printed characters and graphics.
Resolution
Clear Text
To change the menu options:
Prints text darker than on a normal document.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.
It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics
for improving readability.
Edge Enhance
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Print Setup on the touch screen.
The printer detects the printing data from computer
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or
skip the blank page.
Skip Blank Pages
Auto CR
Item
Description
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a
page.
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
•
•
Portrait
Sets the emulation type and option.
•
Emulation Type: The machine language defines how
Emulation
the computer communicates with the machine.
•
Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected
Orientation
emulation type.
Landscape
Duplex
You can set the machine to print on both sides of paper.
221
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
1
Item
Description
Copy feature
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Reduce/Enlarge
If the machine is set to Eco mode, reduce and
enlarge features are not available.
To change the menu options:
Copy quickly with basic copy settings. Copies can be
customized through detailed options.
Basic Copy
Custom Copy
Auto Fit Copy
Copies
•
Press
Or
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Customized the settings for a current copy job.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image to
fit on the paper currently loaded in the machine.
•
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Default Setting > Copy Default on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Enter the number of copies using the number keypad.
Check the current tray settings and change the settings
if necessary.
For the model with a touch screen, press
you want on the touch screen.
(Copy) > select the menu item
Tray
Auto: Automatically locates the tray with the
Item
Description
same sized paper as an original.
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on
Original Type
Sets the direction in which information is copied on a
page
Original Orientation
222
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 71)
Darkness
•
1 ->1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints
it on one side of the paper.
•
1->2 Sided
•
•
Collation
Sets the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if
you make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3
page document will print followed by a second
complete document.
Collation Copy
•
On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of
originals.
•
•
•
1->2 Sided, Rotated
2->1 Sided
Duplex
•
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual
pages.
2->1 Sided, Rotated
Layout
Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc.
•
2->2 Sided
223
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
Prints an image without its background. This copy
feature removes the background color and can be
helpful when copying an original containing color in
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and
staple marks along any of the four edges of a document.
•
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
Adjust Background
Auto: Optimizes the background.
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the
more vivid the background is.
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is
small. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
Edge Erase
•
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter
the background is.
•
•
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper
which is black and horizontal, when you copy a
book. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
•
Border Erase: Erases certain amount of top, bottom,
right, and left border of the original.
You can apply the stamp feature.
•
•
Stamp Activate: You can activate the stamp feature.
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, comment, or user ID, to
the copy output.
Stamp
•
•
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
Position: Sets the position.
224
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
The watermark option allows you to print text over an
existing document. For example, you use it when you
want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or
“CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first
page or all pages of a document.
Watermark
ID Copy
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item
such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page
73).
•
•
•
N-Up Copy
2-Up
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4
pages onto one sheet of paper. You can select the
direction in which information is copied on a page.
4-Up
1
2
3
4
225
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire
book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm
(1.18 inches), start copying with the cover open.
•
•
Save Program
Load Program
This option allows you to save the current settings for
future use. You can also use the previous settings from
the last jobs.
Book Copy
•
•
•
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the
book.
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the
book.
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of
the book.
This copy feature is available only when you
place originals on the scanner glass.
226
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
2
Copy Setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
Press
Or
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Item
Change Default
Description
The copy options can be set to those most frequently
used.
227
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
3
Item
Description
Fax Feature
The default document settings produce good results
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 79).
Resolution
Some menus may not appear in the display depending options or models.
Selects the color mode in which you want to send the
fax.
Color Mode
To change the menu options:
Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned.
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.
Original Type
Original Size
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
Sets the image size.
This function is especially intended for two-sided
originals. You can select whether the machine sends
the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
•
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
on the touch screen.
(Fax) > select titem you want
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
only.
•
•
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
Duplex
Item
Description
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 80).
Darkness
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the
originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot
detect the original on the DADF, it
automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
228
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
Item
Description
Item
Description
Memory Send
On Hook Dial
Fax can be customized through detailed options.
Access a dial tone to send fax.
•
•
Send Forward
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, PC, etc. If you are out of office but have to
receive the fax, this feature may be useful.
Receive Forward
Speed Dial Send
Group Dial Send
Fax image to destination from speed dial list.
Fax image to destination from group dial list.
•
•
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller
ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number
in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.
To print received documents, you need to enter the
password. You can prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving
Redial
Secure Receive
Cancel Job
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
Multi Send
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
•
•
Save Program
This option allows you to save the current settings for
future use. You can also use the previous settings from
the last jobs.
Load Program
•
•
Delay Send
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you
will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on
Delayed Send
4
Sending setup
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
229
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
To change the menu options:
Item
Description
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.
•
•
Fax Confirmation
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not.
Fax Send
Confirmation
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Item
Description
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the
phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You
can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps.
Modem speed
Image TCR
Dial Mode
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the
machine will not redial.
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of
the first page of the fax sent.
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing a PABX exchange.
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This
setting may not be available depending on your
country.
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any
error. It may take more time.
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call
costs. This setting may not be available depending on
your country.
Toll Save
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options
such as machine ID, fax number, etc.
Fax Setup Wizard
230
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
5
Item
Description
Receiving setup
•
•
Stamp Rcv Name
Automatically prints the page number, and the date
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
Stamp Received
Name
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
Rcv Start Code
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the
factory.
Receive Start Code
To change the menu options:
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the
size of the paper loaded in the machine.
•
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control
Auto Reduction
panel.
Discards a specific length from the end of the received
fax.
Discard Size
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen.
Junk Fax Setup
This setting may not be available depending on your
country. Using this feature, the system will not accept
faxes sent from remote stations whose numbers are
stored in the memory as junk fax numbers. This feature
is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Description
When you turn on this feature, you can access the
following options to set junk fax numbers.
Selects the default fax receiving mode (see "Changing
Receive Mode
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer
several different telephone numbers. You can set the
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each
number. This setting may not be available depending
on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before
answering an incoming call.
Ring To Answer
DRPD Mode
231
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
6
Item
Description
Change Default setup
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.
You can save the paper usage.
•
•
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Duplex Print
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the long edge.
•
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the short edge.
To change the menu options:
This option allows users to select sending/receiveing
fax manually using the On Hook Dial button,
extension telephone, or a handset.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control
Manual TX/RX
panel.
Item
Description
The fax options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Change Default
232
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
7
Manual TX/RX setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Manual TX/RX on the
control panel.
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Description
This option allows users to select sending/receiveing
fax manually using the On Hook Dial button,
extension telephone, or a handset.
Manual TX/RX
233
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
8
Item
Description
Scan feature
•
•
•
FTP Feature
FTP Default
FTP
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
•
SMB Feature
SMB Default
SMB
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
To change the menu options:
Sets scan destination to an shared folder server. You
scan the originals and send the scanned image to an
folder server (see "Using shared folder features" on
Local PC
•
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer.
You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a
•
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Network PC
For the model with a touch screen, press
you want on the touch screen.
(Scan) > select the menu item
Item
Description
•
•
USB Feature
USB
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
•
•
Scan to Email
Email
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals
and email the scanned image to destinations (see
234
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan
multiple pages. Depending on the selected scan type,
this option may not appear.
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create
and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder
Shared Folder
9
•
Multi-Page PDF: Scans originals in PDF, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
Scan setup
•
Single-Page PDF: Scans the originals in PDF, and
several originals are scanned as an each individual
PDF file.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged
Image File Format), but several originals are scanned
as one file.
Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF
(Tagged Image File Format), and several originals are
scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
To change the menu options:
File Format
•
•
Multi-Page XPS: Scans originals in XPS, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
•
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
Single-Page XPS: Scans the originals in XPS, and
several originals are scanned as an each individual
XPS file.
•
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
•
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
For the model with a touch screen, press
you want on the touch screen.
(Scan) > select the menu item
•
•
XPS: This feature is only supported for the
devices that have mass storage.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in
the File Format option, if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
235
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1
Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides
of the paper (2 Sided Rotated).
Destination
Enter the destination's information.
The scan options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Change Default
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Sets the image size.
•
•
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
Sets the original document’s type.
Sets the image resolution.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Duplex
You can select the color options of scan outputs.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the
machine shows the window asking to place
another page. Load another original and press
Yes. When you finish, select No for this option.
•
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per
pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
•
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image.
8 bits per pixel.
Color Mode
You can choose the policy for generating file name
before you proceed with the scan job through server or
USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory
device already has the same name you enter, you can
change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it.
•
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit
per pixel.
File Policy
File Name
•
Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file
name that is automatically programmed.
•
Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file.
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.
Makes a file name to store the scan data.
236
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
You can set the machine to print server confirmation
result report.
Digital signature the PDF files when you scan the
originals in PDF format. Select On to digital signature in
PDF file, and set up a digital signature. To open the file,
users need to enter the digital signature.
Digital Signature in
PDF
Server Confirmation
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
Subject
From
CC
Sets an email’s subject.
Sets a sender’s email address.
Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient.
You can set the machine to print email confirmation
result report.
The same as CC but the recipient's name is not
displayed.
BCC
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the
connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web
Service for Device) feature.
•
•
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
WSD
Email Confirmation
If a report contains characters or fonts that
the machine does not support, Unknown
could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report.
•
•
Save Program
Load Program
This option allows you to save the current settings for
future use. You can also use the previous settings from
the last jobs.
Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in
PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set
up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the
password
PDF Encryption
237
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
10
Item
Description
Sets the date and time.
Machine setup
Date & Time
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and
24 hr.
Clock Mode
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
This feature works best when you are using an extension
telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of
your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you
are talking to on the extension telephone, without going
to the fax machine. *9* is the remote receive code preset
To change the menu options:
Receive Code
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Initial Setup on the touch screen.
Select Country
Sound/Volume
Selects the country.
•
•
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Sets the sound/volume option (see "Sound / Volume" on
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the
memory. The machine overwrites the data with different
patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) on the touch screen.
Image Overwrite
Language
Item
Description
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control
panel display.
•
•
Machine ID
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Machine ID & Fax
Number
When the problems in the machine occur, some error
messages are shown with animations to help you solve
the problems (see "Clearing jams" on page 116).
Troubleshooting
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Fax Number
238
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode, copy
mode, or scan mode.
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match the
paper settings.
Default Mode
Default Paper Size
You can set the default paper size to use.
•
0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing
when the paper size you have set is mismatched with
the paper in the tray.
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power
save mode.
Auto Continue
Power Save
•
30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,
then automatically clear the message and continue
printing.
When the machine does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine
restores the default copy settings.
•
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits
until you insert the correct paper.
System Timeout
Altitude
Adjustment
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s
altitude.
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing
the last page of a print job that does not end with a
command to print the page.
Job Timeout
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
Auto CR
Held Job Timeout
Sets the time to hold the temprarily stopped job.
Firmware Version
Shows the product’s firmware version.
When this option is "On", you can wake up the machine
If you use a machine in a humid area, or you are using the
damp print media caused by a high humidity, the print-
outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be
stacked properly. In this case, you can set the machine to
use this function to let print-outs stacked firmly. But,
using this function will make the print speed slow.
from the power saving mode with the following actions:
•
•
•
•
loading paper in a tray
Paper Stacking
Wakeup Event
opening or closing the front cover
pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in
connecting a USB memory device (only for the models
that support USB memory devices)
239
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For
example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same
size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2
after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
Activating this mode extends the life of your toner
cartridge and reduces your cost per page beyond what
one would experience in the normal mode, but it reduces
print quality.
Toner Save
Auto Tray Switch
Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as
a PDF file.
This option does not appear if you selected Auto
for Paper Source from printer driver.
•
•
Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF.
PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary
information to render itself in any environment.
PDF Type
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.
PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely
on another application to render fonts, open
hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video
files.
Paper Substitution
Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature.
If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is excluded
You can apply the stamp feature.
during tray switching.
•
•
Stamp Activate: You can activate the stamp feature.
Tray Protection
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, comment, or user ID, to
the copy output.
Stamp
This setting works for copy or print jobs: It doesn't
affect fax jobs.
•
•
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
Position: Sets the position.
Address Book
Views or prints the address list.
240
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the
machine.
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Import Setting
Export Setting
CLR Empty Msg
Exports data stored on the machine stick to a USB
memory.
Customizes the toner low or toner empty alert for toner
Toner Low Alert
Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-
friendly printing.
Imaging Unit Low
Alert
Customizes the toner low or toner empty alert for
imaging unit.
•
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode
on or off.
Print Setup
Customizes the print job.
11
Eco Settings
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.
Admin setup
•
•
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview"
•
Select Template: Selects the eco template set from
the SyncThru™ Web Service.
You need to enter a password to enter this menu. The default password
is sec00000.
Custom Color
This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color.
•
•
Default: Optimizes colors automatically.
Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color
density for print. Adjust the print density.
For the model with a touch screen, press
the touch screen.
(Setup) > Admin Setup > Next on
It is recommended to use the Default setting for best
color quality.
•
•
Image
Management
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
Image Mar.
241
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Change Admin.
Password
Changes the machine’s password for accessing the Admin
Setup.
Controls user access to a machine. You can assign different
levels of permissions to use the machine to each user.
Firmware
Upgrade
Upgrades to the latest firmware. Turn this option "On" and
then download the firmware file.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™
Web Service. Open the Web browser from your
networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click
the Security tab > User Access Control (see
User Access
Control
You can select the method for overwriting the secure non-
volatile memory.
•
Custom: Select to determine the number of times the
memory will be overwritten. The hard disk will be
overwritten as many times as the number you select.
•
German VSITR: Select to overwrite the memory 7 times.
When overwriting for the 6 times, alternate 0x00 and 0xff
are used to overwrite the disk, and, in the 7th time, the
disk is written with 0xAA.
Stamp
Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu.
You can set secure release settings. Secure release feature
allows you to hold the job on the machine and print after
authentication.
Image Overwrite
•
•
DoD5220.28-M: Select to overwrite the memory 3 times.
When overwriting three times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97
are used to overwrite the disk’s content. This method of
overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD.
•
•
•
Max Job Count per User: You can set the number of
print jobs allowed for each user.
Australian ACSI33: Select to overwrite the memory 5
times. When overwriting 5 times, character “C” and its
complement alternatively are used to overwrite the disk.
After the 2nd time, there is a mandatory validation. For
the 5th time, random data is used.
Smart Release: You can print all the stored print jobs you
sent after loggin in at once.
Secure Release
Release Mode: You can choose the release mode. If you
choose Secure Mode, normal and confidential jobs are
printed after authentication. However, store jobs are
printed without an authentication. Other jobs gets
cancelled. If you choose Mixed Mode, confidential jobs
are printed after authentication but other jobs are
printed without an authentication.
242
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
You can install or uninstall applications.
Item
Paper Type
Paper Source
Margin
Description
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.
Selects from which tray the paper is used.
Sets the margins for the document.
•
Application Management: You can uninstall or enable/
Application
disable installed applications.
•
Install New Application: You can install a new
application from a USB.
•
•
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
12
Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided
printing.
Paper setup
Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper,
side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same
as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the
sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the
same.
Common Margin
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
To change the menu options:
Sets the paper margins for emulation print page.
Emulation Margin
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Next > Paper Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Description
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,
according to your requirements.
Paper Size
243
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
13
Item
Description
Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray.
Sound / Volume
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
MP Tray
•
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
To change the menu options:
Manual Feeder
Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound/Volume on the control panel.
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and
close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the
paper size and type for the tray just opened appears.
Tray Confirmation
For the model with a touch screen, press
Next > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup>
Sets the paper margins for the paper trays.
Item
Key Sound
Description
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Turns the key sound on or off. A tone sounds each time a
key is pressed if this option is on.
<Tray X>
•
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
Turns the alarm sound on or off. An alarm tone sounds
when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this
option is on.
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Alarm Sound
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
244
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
14
Item
Description
Report
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker
is on until the remote machine answers.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only
when the telephone line is connected.
To change the menu options:
Speaker Volume
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.
a Press
(fax) on the control panel.
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup>
the speaker.
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you
Next > Reports on the touch screen.
want.
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and
Item
Description
return to ready mode.
Prints a report on the machine's overall
configuration.
Configuration
Adjusts the dial tone volume. You can select different
levels.
Dial Tone Volume
Ring Volume
•
•
Supplies Info.
Prints supplies’ information page.
Supplies Information
Adjusts the ring volume. You can select different levels.
Prints all of the addresses currently stored in the
machine’s memory.
Address Book
Demo Page
Prints the demo page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
245
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Usage Counter
Description
Prints the help page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the
total number of pages printed.
Help List
Fax Send Confirmation
Fax Sent
Prints fax confirmation result.
Fax Options
Junk Fax
Prints the information of a fax report.
Prints the junk fax numbers.
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
sent.
This is only available when Job Accounting is
enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service. Print a report of printout counts for each
user.
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
received.
Fax Received
Email Sent
Account
Prints information on the emails you have
recently sent.
15
•
•
Fax Scheduled Jobs
Fax Schedule Jobs
Prints the document list currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and
type of each operation.
Maintenance
Prints information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
Network Configuration
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
PCL Font List
PS Font List
EPSON Font
KSC5843 Font
KSC5895 Font
KSSM Font
Prints the PCL font list.
Prints the PS/PS3 font list.
Prints the EPSON font list.
Prints the KSC5843 font list.
Prints the KSC5895 font list.
Prints the KSSM font list.
246
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
16
To change the menu options:
Address book setup
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Appears when the toner cartridge is empty. You can clear
CLR Empty Msg.
Supplies Life
Image Mar.
the empty message.
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the
•
Press
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book on the touch
screen.
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
ltem
Description
You can create a individual.
Customizes the alert toner low or toner empty (see
TonerLow Alert
Individual
Group
Imaging Unit Low
Alert
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty.
You can create a group.
Print
You can print the address book.
You can delete the current all address book.
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you
can find this.
Delete All
Serial Number
Ram Disk
Enables/disables RAM Disk to manage jobs.
247
3. Useful Setting Menus
Network setup
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Selects this option to use the network environment
TCP/IP(IPv6)
Configure the network transmission speed or port.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 316).
Ethernet
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Select the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the
network administrator.
802.1x
Wi-Fi
•
•
Press
(Menu)> Network on the control panel,
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Setup) > Machine Setup >
Selects this option to use the wireless network.
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
Next > Network Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Description
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment (see "Setting
Clear Settings
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Network
Configuration
Displays information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
TCP/IP(IPv4)
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network
administrator.
248
3. Useful Setting Menus
Network setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off.
•
•
HTTP: You can set whether to use SyncThru™ Web
Service or not.
WINS: You can configure the WINS server. WINS
(Windows Internet Name Service) is used in the
Windows operating system.
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Speed
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
•
•
SNMPv1/v2: You can set SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). Administrator’s can use SNMP
to monitor and manage machines on the network.
You can set the ethernet speed.
SNTP: You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time
Protocol) settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the
computer systems through the Internet (NTP) so there
would not be a time difference when exchanging
data.
Protocol
Management
•
•
UPnP(SSDP): You can set UPnP protocol.
mDNS: You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name
System) settings.
•
•
SetIP: You can set whether to use SyncThru™ Web
Service or not.
SLP: You can configure SLP (Service Location
Protocol) settings. This protocol allows host
applications to find services in a local area network
without prior configuration.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
249
3. Useful Setting Menus
Job management
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > Job Management on the control panel.
Item
Description
Active Job
Stored Job
Secured Job
Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed.
Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk.
Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk.
Shows the print job lists that are in the shared folder on
the disk.
Shared Folder
250
3. Useful Setting Menus
Job Status
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Job Status) > select the menu item you want on the touch
screen.
Item
Description
Current Job
Displays the list of jobs in progress and pending.
Displays the list of completed jobs.
Complete Job
251
3. Useful Setting Menus
Eco
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Eco) > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Description
Eco-On
Eco-Off
View current eco mode and change on/off option.
Sets eco-related settings and change default settings.
•
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the
Settings
default mode.
•
Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or
Custom mode.
252
3. Useful Setting Menus
USB
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press USB.
•
Press
(USB) > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Description
•
•
USB Print
Select a file to print.
Print From
Scan to USB
File Manage
Show Space
Scan the document to the USB device.
Select a file to delete. You can format the USB device.
Shows the remaining space.
253
3. Useful Setting Menus
Document box
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Press
(Document Box) > select the menu item you want > Next on the
touch screen.
Item
Description
System Boxes
Saves the print data first and starts printing.
•
Stored Print: Prints the stored data without entering
a password.
•
Secured Print: Prints the stored data with entering a
password.
Shared Folder
Show the shared folders on your network and save your
scanned data there.
254
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan to cloud
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Press
(Scan to Cloud) > select the menu item you want > Next on the
touch screen.
Item
Google Drive
Dropbox
Description
Sets scan destination to Google Drive, Dropbox, Evernote
for cloud service. You scan the originals and send the
scanned image to Google Drive, Dropbox, Evernote (see
Evernote
255
3. Useful Setting Menus
Secure release
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
You can see the jobs stored in the machine and their
information. You can print or delete the stored jobs.
Stored Job
You can see the jobs currently submitted in the machine
and their information.
Current Job
Press
(Secure Release) on the touch screen.
Displays the list of print jobs the user has set in the printer driver. Set the
print jobs from the Printing preferences window > select the mode from
Item
Description
You can select the authentication methods to use for
secure release feature. You can select more than one
method for authentication. For example, if you select Card
and PIN, users need to be authorized by both card and PIN
number. You can change the default login window from
the SyncThru™ Web Service.
Options
•
•
•
Card: You can register the card to use for
authentication.
ID/PW: You can register the ID/PW to use for
authentication.
PIN: You can register the PIN number to user for
authentication.
256
3. Useful Setting Menus
Altitude adjustment
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
>
5,000 m
(16,404 ft)
1
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
•
•
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page
2
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
3
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s
4
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
High 4
High 3
High 2
High 1
Normal
258
4. Special Features
Storing email address
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
If you make a group,
1 Click Address Book > Group > Add Group.
2 Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add
individual(s) after this group is created.
3 Click Apply.
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
2
1
Searching for an email address
Storing on your machine
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email
address using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Searching sequentially through memory
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
1
2
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
address group > All on the control panel.
OR
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.
2
For the model with a touch screen, select
Setup > Next > Address Book > Email > View List > Individual or
Group on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number.
3
Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select
the name and address you want.
If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set
the information.
Click Apply.
4
259
4. Special Features
Storing email address
Searching with a particular first letter
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
1
address group > ID on the control panel.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine
Setup > Next > Address Book > Email > View Lists > Individual or
Group on the touch screen.
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, press
enter the first few letters of the name you want.
(options) > Search >
Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears.
260
4. Special Features
Entering various characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
Key
1
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
@ / . ’ 1
2
A B C a b c 2
D E F d e f 3
G H I g h i 4
J K L j k l 5
3
3
Understanding keypad
4
5
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6.
6
M N O m n o 6
7
P Q R S p q r s 7
T U V t u v 8
W X Y Z w x y z 9
& + - , 0
8
•
•
•
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
9
To delete the last digit or character, press the arrows button.
0
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
*
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]
•
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
#
# = | ? " : { } < > ;
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
261
4. Special Features
Entering various characters
4
•
: Deletes character in the input area.
Understanding pop-up keyboard
•
•
: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
: Saves and closes input result.
•
•
This feature is only available for models with a touch screen.
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
•
•
: Enters a blank between characters. Also, you can insert a pause.
: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys.
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical marks, or special
symbols using the keyboard on the home screen. This keyboard is specially
arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability to the user.
•
•
: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the numbers or special
symbols keyboard.
: Switches diacritical characters.
Touch the input area where you need to enter alphabet characters, numbers,
diacritical marks, or special symbols and the keyboard pops up on the screen.
•
•
: Returrns to the upper menu.
: Deletes all characters in the input area.
262
4. Special Features
Setting up the address book
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
5
mode.
5
6
Registering a speed dial number
Using speed dial numbers
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
1
2
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.
OR
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the corresponding digit
button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds.
For the model with a touch screen, select
Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View Lists > Individual
(options) > Add on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s) and
then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
>
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Fax) > Speed Dial Send or Group
For the model with a touch screen, enter the name, fax number, email
address, and speed dial number. Press
Dial Send > Next. You can select the number you want.
(Back) and go to step 5..
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press
.
Enter the name you want and press OK.
3
263
4. Special Features
Setting up the address book
7
8
Editing speed dial numbers
Registering a group dial number
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
1
1
OR
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine
Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View Lists > Individual
Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View Lists > Group>
on the touch screen.
(options) > Add on the touch screen.
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
Enter a group dial number and press OK.
2
3
2
For the model with a touch screen, select the speed dial number you
want to edit.
For the model with a touch screen, press the Group Members > Phone
Book .
Change the name and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
For the model with a touch screen, change the name, fax number, email
address, and speed dial number. Press
(Back) and go to step 5.
number, press
.
Change the fax number and press OK.
4
5
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in
the group.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
3
4
mode.
For the model with a touch screen, select an individual address and press
(Back).
Select the name and number you want and press OK.
264
4. Special Features
Setting up the address book
Select Yes when Add? appears.
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.
5
6
7
3
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears.
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and
press OK.
For the model with a touch screen, press Group Members > add or
delete the group number using the Phone Book. Go to step 7.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
Press OK to add or delete the number.
8
4
5
6
7
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.
Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.
9
Editing group dial numbers
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
1
2
10
OR
Searching address book for an entry
For the model with a touch screen, select
Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View Lists > Group on
the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name
associated with the number.
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
For the model with a touch screen, press Name > edit the group name
using the keyboad.
265
4. Special Features
Setting up the address book
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial
You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV
file format using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
or Group Dial on the control panel.
OR
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
For the model with a touch screen, select
Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View Lists > Group>
(Setup) > Machine
Click Address Book tab > Individual.
(options) > Search on the touch screen.
2
Select Export form the Task drop down list.
Enter All or ID and press OK.
3
2
3
For the model with a touch screen, enter the name, number, or letter you
want to search and press OK from the keyboard. Go to step 4.
Select the option you want and click the Export button.
4
Then the address book file stored in your computer.
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter
you want to search.
12
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,
which is labeled with “MNO.”
Importing Address Book
You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the
machine by exporting to the machine from your computer.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
4
11
Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file.
Exporting Address Book
•
•
•
•
Password-protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited.
The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF-8.
Do not change the first row (model name, version, title field).
Use comma(,) as a separator.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
266
4. Special Features
Setting up the address book
•
When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine,
the existing address book data is deleted.
Select ct
OR
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.
1
•
Make sure to enter valid data. If you enter invalid data, unexpected errors
can occur. Refer to the below rules for entering valid data.
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Setup) > Machine
-
-
-
-
Speed dial: A number is required for each address. You cannot use
duplicate numbers. Only numbers are allowed.
Setup > Next > Report > Address Book on the touch screen.
User Name: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 64 byte
in UTF-8. <, “, >, \, / in not allowed.
Press OK.
2
For the model with a touch screen, press Yes when the confirmation
windows appears.
Fax: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 40 byte using
numbers (0-9) and special characters (#,*,-).
The machine begins printing.
E-mail: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 128 byte in
email address format (ex: [email protected])
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
Click Address Book tab > Individual.
Select Import form the Task drop down list.
Select Browse, and select the stored file.
Click Import > OK.
2
3
4
5
13
Printing address book
You can check your address book settings by printing a list.
267
4. Special Features
Registering authorized users
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail
Address, and Fax Number.
9
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)
after this group is created.
To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network
server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your
local machine using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Apply.
10
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
3
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.
4
5
Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode, and select
Local Authentication in the Authentication Method, and click.
Click Apply.
6
7
8
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.
Click User Profile > Add.
268
4. Special Features
Printing features
•
If Printing preferences has a ►, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Change the settings on each tab.
5
6
Click OK.
14
Changing the default print settings
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
15
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
2
Setting your machine as a default machine
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
•
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
2
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
Right-click on your machine.
3
4
and Sound > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
Preferences.
•
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
269
4. Special Features
Printing features
Select your machine.
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.
3
1
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
4
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
►, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
16
Using advanced print features
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.
•
•
The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
higher.
Click Print.
2
3
•
•
Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the
printer is out of memory.
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example, c:\Temp\file name.
For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website, http://
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
270
4. Special Features
Printing features
Understanding special printer features
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print
settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
Item
Description
Multiple Pages Per Side
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size
and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
Poster Printing
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic
tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
271
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to
produce a booklet.
a
Booklet Printing
•
•
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
9
8
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to
see what paper sizes are available.
•
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without
or mark).
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
Double-Sided Printing
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page
of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
272
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the
machine.
•
•
None: Disables this feature.
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
Double-Sided Printing
•
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
•
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing.
Paper Options
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or
decrease the document.
273
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
Watermark
(Creating a watermark)
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
d Click Update to save the changes.
Watermark
(Editing a watermark)
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Watermark
(Deleting a watermark)
274
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
This option is available only when you use the
L/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 8).
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
•
•
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a
watermark.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Overlay drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default
is C:\FormOver).
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
Overlay
(Creating a new page
overlay)
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
275
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
a Click the Advanced tab.
b Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down list.
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay
file you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List box.
Overlay
(Using a page overlay)
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit
a document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
b Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
d Click Delete.
Overlay
(Deleting a page overlay)
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
276
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
•
This feature is available only if you have installed the mass storage device or optional memory (see "Various features" on page
10).
•
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the RAM Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and
Confidential.
•
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
-
-
Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies
later.
-
-
-
-
Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
Print Mode
Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document
into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computer’s work load.
-
Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
•
•
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel.
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears
as the user name that you use to log on Windows.
•
•
Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the
document box. This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
277
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
•
•
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job.
•
•
Click the question mark(
) from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service.
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.
278
4. Special Features
Printing features
17
Printing
Using Direct Printing Utility
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
1
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or
optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
•
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility.
2
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
What is Direct Printing Utility?
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your
machine to print without having to open the file.
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.
4
The file is added in the Select Files section.
To install this program:
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
5
6
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
•
•
•
•
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing
restriction feature and retry printing.
Using the right-click menu
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.
1
Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
Select the machine to use.
The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
2
Customize the machine settings.
3
279
4. Special Features
Printing features
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Changing printer settings
4
18
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Mac printing
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet
Printing a document
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
1
Open the document to print.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
1
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
on one sheet of paper.
2
Select the other options to use.
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
3
Click Print.
4
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
Open the File menu and click Print.
4
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
5
Click Print.
6
280
4. Special Features
Printing features
Printing on both sides of the paper
Using help
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Various features" on page
10).
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
•
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
1
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
Select the other options to use.
2
3
4
5
19
Linux printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
281
4. Special Features
Printing features
Printing from applications
Printing files
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard
CUPS directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
Open the document to print.
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
1
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some
2
applications).
Configuring Printer Properties
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make
3
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration,
sure that your machine is selected. Click Apply.
you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.
Open the File menu and click Print.
4
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
1
Select your machine to print.
5
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
6
Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.
2
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
7
Click Print.
8
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by models" on page 8).
282
4. Special Features
Printing features
20
The Printer Properties window appears.
3
Unix printing
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•
•
General: Allows you to change the printer location and name. The
name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers
configuration.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by models" on
Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If you change
the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you
must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
•
•
Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine driver. By
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
Proceeding the print job
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print.
Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the
selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see
previous jobs on the job list.
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
1
For example, if you are printing “document1”
•
Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class
to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class
to remove the machine from the selected class.
printui document1
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.
4
Select a printer that has been already added.
2
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
3
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
4
283
4. Special Features
Printing features
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
Press OK to start the print job.
•
•
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
5
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Changing the machine settings
Image tab
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
print options in printer Properties.
document.
Text tab
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
and “C” for Cancel.
Margins tab
•
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
General tab
•
•
•
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
•
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Selection.
•
•
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
284
4. Special Features
Scan features
•
•
FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
•
•
•
Scan to WSD: Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a
connected computer if the computer supports the WSD (Web Service for
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
•
•
Scan to Cloud: You can scan an image and the scanned data will be stored
TWAIN: TWAIN is one of the a preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page
292).
21
Basic scanning method
•
•
•
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan
You can scan the originals with your machine via a USB cable or the network. The
following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto
•
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
•
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
285
4. Special Features
Scan features
22
23
Setting the scan settings in the computer
Scanning from network connected machine
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Rear view" on page 22).
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver
1
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.
3
Select the option you want.
4
Select
OR
(Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel.
•
•
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on
the device.
2
3
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device
settings.
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Scan)> Network PC >
Next > select the scan destination you want on the touch screen.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Press Save > OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
5
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
286
4. Special Features
Scan features
24
•
ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer
Scanning to email
Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
•
Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Printer Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC
Settings.
Select the option you want and press OK.
Setting up an email account
4
5
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
select the option you want using arrows > Start button on the touch
screen.
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
2
Scanning begins.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
3
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
4
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
5
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
6
Press Apply.
7
287
4. Special Features
Scan features
Enter an email subject and press OK.
5
6
•
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
For the model with a touch screen, press Direct Input or Address Book
> enter the email address using number keypad on the touch screen.
•
Enter the IP address and port number.
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
Scanning and sending an email
select the option you want using arrows > Start button on the touch
screen.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
7
25
Select
OR
(scan) > Scan to Email on the control panel.
2
Scanning to FTP/SMB server
For the model with a touch screen, select
the touch screen.
(Scan) > Email > Next on
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru™ Web
3
4
Setting up an FTP/SMB server
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self
option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.
2
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.
3
288
4. Special Features
Scan features
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server
4
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
5
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
1
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access
of unauthorized people.
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Enter the login name and password.
7
Select
OR
(scan) > Scan to SMB or Scan to FTP on the control panel.
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain,
otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB
server.
3
8
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Scan) > SMB or FTP >
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.
Next > select the scan destination you want on the touch screen.
9
Select a server and scan format you want.
4
5
•
•
•
The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.
The folder properties need to be setup as a share.
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Option settings) >
select the option you want using arrows > Start button on the touch
screen.
Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.
Press Apply.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
10
289
4. Special Features
Scan features
26
•
•
The IP address for WSD printer is http://IP address/ws/ (example: http://
111.111.111.111/ws/).
Scanning to WSD
If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, click The printer that I want
isn't listed > Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and
select Web Services Device from Device type. Then enter the printer's
IP address.
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the
computer supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. To use the WSD
feature, you need to install the WSD printer driver on your computer. For
Windows 7, you can install the WSD driver by Control Panel > Devices and
Printers > Add a printer. Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
from the wizard.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
4
•
•
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Features by models" on page 8).
Scanning using the WSD feature
The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista® or later version that are
the WSD-compliant computer.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1
powered on.
•
The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Installing a WSD Printer Driver
Select
(scan) > Scan to WSD on the control panel.
3
Select Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Add a printer.
1
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection. Or check the
printer driver for WSD is correctly installed.
Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard.
2
In the printers list, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
3
Select your computer name from Destination List.
4
290
4. Special Features
Scan features
Select the option you want and press OK.
5
To log in automatically, check Enable Auto Login > press OK.
Scanning begins.
6
To log in using a different account, press Log out on the touch screen and
log in as a different account.
27
Scanning with cloud service
Press OK.
4
You should be registered to a Google Drvie, Dropbox, and Evernote account
to use this function.
Scanning to Google Drive, Dropbox, and Evernote
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
This feature is only available for models with a touch screen.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Logging into Google Drive, Dropbox, and Evernote
Google Drvie, Dropbox, and Evernote follow each cloud’s log in policy.
Press
(Scan to Cloud) on the touch screen.
3
4
5
6
Press
(Scan to Cloud) on the touch screen.
1
2
3
Select your cloud service from Destination List.
Select the cloud service where you want to send the scanned data.
Select the folder you want to scan to.
Enter the cloud service account and password to access the cloud service
you selected.
If necessary, press
you want.
(Option settings) > select the scan settings
Press Start on the touch screen.
7
Scanning begins.
291
4. Special Features
Scan features
28
29
Scanning from image editing program
Scanning using the WIA driver
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using
additional software:
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1
powered on.
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
3
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.
2
4
Set the scan options.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
6
3
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.
4
New Scan application appears.
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
6
292
4. Special Features
Scan features
Scan and save your scanned image.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
7
1
30
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
2
3
•
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps.
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
Click Samsung Printers, and start Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click Scan ( ) from the home screen.
We recommend using scan features with the Samsung Easy Document Creator
program provided in the supplied sofware CD.
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
4
5
6
•
•
Availabe for Windows OS users only.
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview
image.
•
Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you
install the machine software (see "Using Samsung Easy Document
Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.
7
8
Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share
(Uploading).
If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned
at the same time. Use the
tool to make multiple selection areas.
293
4. Special Features
Scan features
31
Scanning from network connected machine
Mac scanning
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 8).
Scanning from USB connected machine
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3
According to OS, follow steps below.
4
•
For 10.5
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
•
For 10.6 -10.8, select your device below SHARED.
Select the option you want.
4
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
Scan and save your scanned image.
5
6
5
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version.
294
4. Special Features
Scan features
Select the scanner on the list.
4
•
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version.
•
•
For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
•
You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the
Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.
32
Linux scanning
Scanning
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
Click Properties.
5
6
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
3
Click the
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.
7
295
4. Special Features
Scan features
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
Editing an image with Image Manager
8
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools
to edit your scanned image.
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview
Pane.
9
Select the option you want.
10
Scan and save your scanned image.
11
For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type
drop-down list.
296
4. Special Features
Fax features
34
For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on page
76).
Redialing the fax number
Press
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.
1
2
33
Select the fax number you want.
Automatic redialing
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on
the country's factory default setting.
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine starts to
scan and automatically begins to send.
3
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No when Another Page? appears.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
(Start) button to redial the
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press
(Stop or
35
Stop/Clear) button.
Confirming a transmission
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control
1
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
OR
on the display. If you receive an error message, press
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.
2
3
Select the option you want.
297
4. Special Features
Fax features
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
Click Print or OK.
3
4
5
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed.
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending > Fax
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
Confirmation on the control panel.
•
Press
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Fax
Select the Help menu from the window and click on any option you want to
know about.
Confirmation on the touch screen.
36
Click Send.
6
Sending a fax in the computer
37
Delaying a fax transmission
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer
driver.
1
Press
(fax) on the control panel.
2
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
Open the document to be sent.
1
Select Print from the File menu.
2
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
298
4. Special Features
Fax features
Press
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
4
9
OR
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Fax) > Delayed Send
> Next on the touch screen. Go to step 8.
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
5
6
7
•
Press
the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Scheduled Jobs on
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
•
Press
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Fax Schedule
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 5.
Jobs on the touch screen.
•
•
You can add up to 10 destinations.
Canceling a reserved fax job
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group
dial numbers anymore.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the
1
control panel.
Enter the job name and the time.
OR
8
For the model with a touch screen, enter the time > Next > press Direct
Input or Fax List > enter the fax number using number keypad on the
touch screen.
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next on the touch screen.
(Job Status) > Current Job
Select the fax job you want and press OK.
2
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time
on the following day.
For the model with a touch screen, press
want on the touch screen.
(cancel) from fax job you
299
4. Special Features
Fax features
Press OK when Yes highlights.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
3
1
2
For the model with a touch screen, press Yes when the confirmation
windows appears.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control
panel.
Press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to
4
ready mode.
OR
38
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup > Send Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to
Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
•
•
When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
3
4
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in
grayscale.
For the model with a touch screen, turn this option "On" and then enter
the forward number
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
300
4. Special Features
Fax features
39
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
2
Forwarding a received fax
For the model with a touch screen, turn this option "On" and then enter
the forward number
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.
3
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
40
1
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to
Sending faxes on both sides of paper
Server on the control panel.
OR
•
•
This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder.
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup > Receive Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to
PC , Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
•
•
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Various features" on page 10).
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
301
4. Special Features
Fax features
41
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
Receiving a fax in the computer
Press
OR
(fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel.
2
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
For the model with a touch screen, select
you want > select Duplex from the sub-menus > on the touch screen.
(Fax) > select the menu
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel or touch screen:
-
-
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
•
•
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one isde only.
Forward to PC > Forward the control panel.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
Press
(Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen.
2 ->1 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides,
but the back is rotated 180°.
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
1
2
3
4
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the
machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes
the option to 1 Sided.
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.
Press OK to save the selection.
Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings.
3
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
•
•
•
•
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.
Prefix: Select prefix.
Print received fax: Set to print information for the received fax after
receiving the fax.
302
4. Special Features
Fax features
•
•
•
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to notify
receiving a fax.
•
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine is attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with
default application.
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or
opens the application.
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine.
Press Save > OK.
5
42
•
DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
Changing the receive modes
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive
1
2
Mode on the control panel.
OR
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup > Receive Mode on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Press OK to save the selection.
3
4
Select the option you want.
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
•
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home (
) icon to return to ready
mode.
•
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button.
303
4. Special Features
Fax features
43
45
Receiving manually in Tel mode
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT. socket, you
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,
without going to the fax machine.
You can receive a fax call by pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then
pressing
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,
you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by models" on page 8).
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
44
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
want.
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT. socket on
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT. socket, copy
and scan features are not available.
•
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT. socket,
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined
number of rings.
46
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is
a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by
answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need
to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
•
•
If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
304
4. Special Features
Fax features
47
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
1
Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
OR
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password.
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
Call your fax number from another telephone.
2
3
To use the secure receiving mode:
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > On
The machine displays Waiting Ring while recording ring pattern, when
completed learning, the display shows Completed DRPD Setup.
on the control panel.
Press (Setup) > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure
Receive on the touch screen.
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.
4
•
•
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect
the machine to another telephone line.
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
305
4. Special Features
Fax features
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
Printing received faxes
1
2
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive >
1
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print
Print on the control panel.
on the control panel.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
you want > select Duplex from the sub-menus > on the touch screen.
(Fax) > select the menu
For the model with a touch screen, press
> Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive > Print on the touch screen.
(Setup) > Machine Setup
•
•
Off: Prints in Normal mode.
Enter a four-digit password and press OK or Print.
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
2
3
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
48
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper
•
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
2
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
3
5
Press OK to save the selection.
3
For the model with a touch screen, press
selection.
(back) to save the
306
4. Special Features
Fax features
49
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be
processed at the same time.
307
4. Special Features
Using shared folder features
51
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared folder. The
advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder
through your computer’s window.
Using the shared folder
You can use the shared folder in the same was as the normal computer. Create,
edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also store the
scanned data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on a the
shared folder. You can print TIFF, JPEG and PRN files.
•
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user’ s
access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users.
50
Creating a shared folder
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.
1
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example: \\169.254.133.42) in the
address field, and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.
3
308
4. Special Features
Using optional device features
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
3
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Various features" on page
10).
52
From the printer driver
If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such
as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass
storage or RAM Disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various
Click Properties or Preferences.
4
5
6
Click the each tab then select Print Mode.
Open the document you want to print.
1
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
2
Select OK.
7
53
From the control panel
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use
these features.
Press
(Menu) button > Job Management on the control panel.
309
4. Special Features
Using optional device features
OR
For the model with a touch screen, press
(Document Box) > Next >
System Boxes on the touch screen.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active
job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.
Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured
jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name
and password set in the printer driver.
•
•
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file name before
you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory
already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
310
4. Special Features
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
2
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.
3
4
5
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
Click the management tool you want to use.
•
•
After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
312
5. Useful Management Tools
Easy Capture Manager
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard. Now you can easily print your captured screen as
captured or edited.
313
5. Useful Management Tools
Samsung AnyWeb Print
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
314
5. Useful Management Tools
Easy Eco Driver
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1
2
3
4
5
Open a document to print.
Open printing preference window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 64).
From the Favorites tab, select Eco Printing Preview.
Click OK > Print in the window. A preview window appears.
Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
Click Print.
6
If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print, check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference
window.
315
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
1
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 8.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
2
SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from
your machine depending on its options or models.
•
•
ID: admin
Network model only (see "Software" on page 8).
Password: sec00000
2
1
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Information tab
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an
error report.
•
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their
severity.
•
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in
the cartridge.
316
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
•
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and
duplex.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
•
•
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.
Security Information: Shows the machine’s security information.
•
•
•
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also
enables or disables machine features.
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail
address, and font reports.
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x,
and Authentication servers.
Address Book tab
User Access Control: You can choose authentication methods/modes for
user authentication. You can add/delete/modify the user profile used for
Local Authentication.
You can manage the address book. This feature is also available from the
machine
•
System Log: The System Log contains settings related to logs of device
•
•
Individual: You can manage individual entries in the address book.
events.
Group: You can manage group address books.
-
-
Log Configuration: The Log Configuration section contains settings
related to saving logs.
Log Viewer: The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs
Settings tab
stored locally on the device.
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
•
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.
317
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
3
Maintenance tab
E-mail notification setup
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be
used more frequently by a machine administrator.
•
•
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.
Application Management: This feature is only available for models with a
touch screen. You can manage the applications. Also you can install new
applications from USB or URL.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
License Management: License Management provides settings for Installed
applications and application licenses.
Cloning: You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine
setting, network information, address book, etc.) between devices that have
the Cloning feature in SyncThru™ Web Service.
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
•
•
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check
information.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > Email Notification.
3
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network
environment before setting e-mail notification.
Select Enable check box to use the Email Notification.
4
318
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email
address.
5
4
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
Click Apply.
5
Click Apply.
6
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that
case, contact the a network administrator.
4
Setting the system administrator’s information
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator
3
319
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below:
•
•
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or multiple pictures.
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
•
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
•
•
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
•
•
E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as
one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format.
Plug-in: Scan, fax, and convert to E-Book directly from the Microsoft Office
program.
Click the Help ( ) button from the window and then click on any option
you want to know about.
320
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
•
•
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager.
Printer list
The Printer List displays printers installed on your
computer and network printers added by network
discovery (Windows only).
•
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps> Samsung Printers >
Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
1
For Mac,
321
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Printer
information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine
status.
Quick links
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
2
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.
You can directly open the necessary section in the
user’s guide.
Contents area
Displays information about the selected machine,
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not
have this feature.
5
6
Application
information
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help,
and about.
Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)
from online.
3
The
button is used to change the user
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window.
interface to the advanced settings user interface
6
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
322
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Fax to PC Settings
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected
device.
•
•
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
Device Settings
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and
allows more options to be set.
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•
•
•
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
•
•
Basic tab: Contains general scan and device settings.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
323
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
Icon
Mean
Normal
Description
machine status.
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
•
•
•
The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Warning
Error
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,
which may lead to toner empty status.
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
The machine has at least one error.
7
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
1
324
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Status
2
Option
You can set printing job alert related settings.
Order Supplies
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
3
User’s Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
4
5
Close
Close the window.
325
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s website, and check connected machine information. This application
will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the machine is
connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
8
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
) tile.
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
1
326
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
9
2
User Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
Order
Supplies
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
3
Adding a printer
Visit Samsung
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
4
5
From the Charms, select Settings.
1
Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
Select Add Printer
2
Select the printer you want to add.
3
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
You can see the added printer.
6
If you see
mark, you can also click
mark to add printers.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
327
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Deleting a printer
4
5
Click the Print button to start the print job.
From the Charms, select Settings.
1
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
Select Remove Printer.
2
3
4
Select the printer you want to delete.
Click Yes.
You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen.
10
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
Open the document to print.
1
From the Charms, select Devices.
2
Select your printer from the list
3
328
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Basic tab
Cancelling a print job
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
) in the Windows task bar.
(
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
button on the control panel.
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)
Opening more settings
Basic
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
Eco settings
You can set up more printing parameters.
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
Open the document you want to print.
1
From the Charms, select Devices.
2
Select your printer from the list
3
Click More settings.
4
329
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Advanced tab
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that this features are not
supported.
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
330
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Using the sharing feature
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
installed on the computer using the sharing feature.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
This feature is only available for printing jpeg, bmp, tiff, gif, and png file
formats.
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
2
Click Scan (
).
3
4
Select the content you want to print from other application.
1
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
From the Charms, select Share > Samsung Printer Experience.
2
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Click Prescan (
) to check the image.
3
5
6
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
4
11
Click Scan (
)and save the image.
Scanning from Windows 8
7
•
•
When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan (
) is not
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
available.
You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
331
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
12
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver
Opening Unified Driver Configurator
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator
icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
1
2
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding
configuration window.
1
2
Printer Configuration
Port Configuration
332
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
Printers tab
To use the on screen help, the Help or
button from the window.
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon
button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver
3
Configurator.
13
Printers configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
1
2
3
Switches to Printers configuration.
Shows all of the installed machines.
Shows the status, model name, and URI of your machine.
333
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
The printer control buttons are, as follows:
Classes tab
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machine.
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working
properly.
•
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer’s properties.
1
2
Shows all of the machine classes.
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class.
•
•
•
Refresh: Renews the classes list.
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
334
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
14
1
2
3
Switches to Ports configuration.
Ports configuration
Shows all of the available ports.
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each
port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has
terminated the job for any reason.
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.
•
•
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
Release port: Releases the selected port.
335
5. Useful Management Tools
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the
troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing.
Paper sticks together.
Clear the paper jam.
•
•
•
•
Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.
Paper does not feed into the machine.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
•
•
•
•
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
The paper keeps jamming.
•
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the
manual feeding in tray.
•
•
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
337
6. Troubleshooting
Power and cable connecting problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power,
•
•
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
press it.
(Power / Wake Up) button on the control,
or the connection cable between the
computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
338
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print.
The machine is not receiving power.
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power /
Wake Up) button on the control, press it.
The machine is not selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
The cover is not closed. Close the cover.
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing jams" on page 116).
No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 49).
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 22).
the machine is not connected properly.
The connection cable between the computer and If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.
the machine is defective.
You can also try using a different machine cable.
The port setting is incorrect.
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to
the correct one.
339
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.
The machine does not
print.
The machine may be configured incorrectly.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.
The machine is malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a service representative.
The document size is so big that the hard disk
space of the computer is insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full.
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects print The paper option that was selected in the
materials from the wrong Printing Preferences may be incorrect.
paper source.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Half the page is blank.
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on
The paper size and the paper size settings do not Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.Or,
match.
ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in
the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on page
64).
340
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
The machine cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.
The wrong printer driver was selected.
The software application is malfunctioning.
The operating system is malfunctioning.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
Try printing a job from another application.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
Pages print, but they are The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.
blank.
•
•
The file may have blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Contact a service representative.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,
may be defective.
The machine does not
print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
341
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor near smoke] during printing.
Using damp/wet paper can cause vapor [white
This is not a problem, just keep printing. If you are bothered by the smoke [vapor], then
replace the paper with fresh paper from an unopened ream.
the output tray.
The machine does not
print special-sized paper,
such as billing paper.
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
The printed billing paper The paper type setting does not match.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
is curled.
342
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition
Suggested solutions
Light or faded print
•
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the
•
•
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
•
•
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
107). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
The top half of the paper is
printed lighter than the rest of
the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
•
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
343
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Toner specks
•
•
•
The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
The paper path may need cleaning. If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.(see "Cleaning the
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
•
•
•
•
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
If white spots appear on the page:
White Spots
•
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
•
The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
344
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The surface (drum part) of the cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the cartridge and install a new
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
107). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Black or color background
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
•
•
Change to a lighter weight paper.
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount
of background shading.
•
•
Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 94).
Toner smear
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
Check the paper type and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
345
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
Vertical repetitive defects
•
•
•
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after
a few more pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
•
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
•
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.
A
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 64).
•
•
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 64). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 94).
Toner particles are around bold The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
characters or pictures
•
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
•
Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging
can occur causing this copy quality problem.
346
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Misformed characters
•
If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.
Page skew
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
Curl or wave
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
347
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Wrinkles or creases
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty
•
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
Solid color or black pages
•
•
The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
•
The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
348
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Loose toner
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
Check the paper type, thickness, and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Character voids
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
•
•
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
The paper may not meet paper specifications.
A
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
•
•
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
349
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
•
•
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
•
An unknown image
repetitively appears on a few
sheets
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such
as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see "Altitude adjustment" on page 258).
•
•
Loose toner
Light print or contamination
occurs
350
6. Troubleshooting
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page
Smears, lines, marks, or spots
appear on copies.
•
•
If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.
If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 111).
Copy image is skewed.
•
•
Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 107).
Blank copies print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Image rubs off the copy easily.
•
•
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occur.
•
Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
•
•
Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer
copies than expected before
running out of toner.
•
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
•
•
The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
Turn the machine off and back on.
351
6. Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The scanner does not work.
•
•
Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
•
•
Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
•
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly.
•
•
•
Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
352
6. Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears on your
computer screen:
•
•
•
•
•
•
There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
•
Device can’t be set to the H/W
mode you want.
•
Port is being used by another
program.
•
•
Port is disabled.
Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
•
•
Invalid handle.
Scanning has failed.
353
6. Troubleshooting
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not working,
there is no display, or the
buttons are not working.
•
•
•
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
Ensure that the power is turned on.
No dial tone.
•
•
Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 22).
Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
do not dial correctly.
The original does not feed into
the machine.
•
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
or thin.
•
•
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not received
automatically.
•
•
•
The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 303).
Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does not send.
•
•
Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank
spaces or is of poor-quality.
•
•
•
•
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
354
6. Troubleshooting
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.
There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 111).
you sent.
The machine dials a number,
but the connection with the
other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask them to solve the problem on their side.
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
355
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
1
Common Windows problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
during installation.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
message appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Samsung Printer Experience is
not shown when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app from the Windows Store and install it.
Machine information is not
displayed when you click the
device in the Devices and
Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
356
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
2
Common Mac problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF files
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or
illustrations are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed normally Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
during cover page printing.
the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
357
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
3
Common Linux problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not print.
•
•
•
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the
Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If
not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list. Look at the
description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button. Normal operation of the machine
should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur.
Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then
remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command line parameter in the
command item.
The machine does not print
whole pages, and output is
printed on half the page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download
the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.
I cannot scan via Gimp Front-
end.
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information,
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help.
“Cannot open port device file” Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print
error message appears when
printing a document.
job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port
while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation
occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window.
358
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not appear
on the scanners list.
•
•
Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on.
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the
window.
•
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. This usually
happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears.
To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start
at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can
see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or
press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly.
The machine does not scan.
•
•
Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer.
If there is an I/O error while scanning.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
4
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.
359
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
Problem
Possible cause
Solution
The PostScript file cannot be
printed
The PostScript driver may not be installed
correctly.
•
•
Install the PostScript driver (see "Software Installation" on page 168).
Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for
printing.
•
If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex.
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
A PostScript error page prints
The print job may not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is not
selected in the driver
The printer driver has not been configured to
recognize the optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the
tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 101).
When printing a document in
The resolution setting in the printer driver may
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader.
higher, colors print incorrectly
360
6. Troubleshooting
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
051 133 1999
8007260000
WebSite
BOSNIA
Country/Region
ALGERIA
Customer Care Center
WebSite
BOTSWANA
0800 100 100
www.samsung.com/
regiões)
BRAZIL
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
centros)
ANGOLA
91-726-7864
0800-333-3733
0-800-05-555
1300 362 603
ARGENTINA
ARMENIA
AUSTRALIA
BULGARIA
BURUNDI
07001 33 11 , share cost tariff
200
7095- 0077
www.samsung.com/
CAMEROON
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €
0.07/min)
AUSTRIA
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ca
AZERBAIJAN
088-55-55-555
8000-4726
CANADA
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/ae
BAHRAIN
BELARUS
BELGIUM
BOLIVIA
www.samsung.com/
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200
CHILE
810-800-500-55-500
02-201-24-18
CHINA
400-810-5858
www.samsung.com/be
01-8000112112
Bogotá: 6001272
COLOMBIA
www.samsung.com/
800-10-7260
361
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
0-800-507-7267
WebSite
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
800-6225
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
COSTA RICA
EL SALVADOR
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
CROATIA
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 786)
8000 0077
ESTONIA
FINLAND
FRANCE
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
030-6227 515
01 48 63 00 00
Cote D’ Ivoire
CYPRUS
CZECH
8009 4000 only from landline
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
70 70 19 70
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 7267864*
DENMARK
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw.
GERMANY
0180 6 67267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf
aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem
Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/
DOMINICA
DRC
www.samsung.com/
GEORGIA
GHANA
8-800-555-555
499999
0800-10077
www.samsung.com/
0302-200077
1-800-10-7267
www.samsung.com/
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
ECUADOR
www.samsung.com/
GREECE
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
EGYPT
EIRE
08000-726786
0818 717100
362
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
1-800-299-0013
WebSite
Country/Region
JAPAN
Customer Care Center
0120-327-527
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
800-22273
065777444
www.samsung.com/
GUATEMALA
JORDAN
www.samsung.com/
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
800-27919267
www.samsung.com/
0800 545 545
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
www.samsung.com/
183-2255 (183-CALL)
www.samsung.com/ae
KUWAIT
(852) 3698-4698
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
KYRGYZSTAN
LATVIA
00-800-500-55-500
8000-7267
HUNGARY
INDIA
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
8-800-77777
261 03 710
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
1800-88-9999
www.samsung.com/
0800-112-8888 (Toll Free)
021-5699-7777
MALAYSIA
INDONESIA
IRAN
MEXICO
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-614-40
021-8255
MOLDOVA
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MOROCCO
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
+7-800-555-55-55
020 405 888
ITALIA
[HHP] 800.Msamsung
(800.67267864)
JAMAICA
1-800-234-7267
080 100 2255
363
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
MOZAMBIQUE
NAMIBIA
Customer Care Center
847267864 / 827267864
08 197 267 864
WebSite
Country/Region
PARAGUAY
Customer Care Center
009 800 542 0001
WebSite
0-800-777-08
PERU
Desde celulares por favor llamar
al número 336 8686
0800-726-7864
www.samsung.com/
NIGERIA
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
(€ 0,10/min)
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline
and Mobile]
PHILIPPINES
02-4222111 [Other landline]
00-1800-5077267
www.samsung.com/
0 801-1SAMSUNG(172-678) *
lub +48 22 607-93-33 **
NICARAGUA
NORWAY
OMAN
www.samsung.com/
[HHP] 0 801-672-678* lub +48 22
607-93-33**
815-56 480
POLAND
* (całkowity koszt połączenia jak
za 1 impuls według taryfy
operatora)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ae
www.samsung.com/
** (koszt połączenia według
taryfy operatora)
0800-Samsung (72678)
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
PORTUGAL
PAKISTAN
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
364
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
WebSite
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
WebSite
800-2255 (800-CALL)
www.samsung.com/ae
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF
0.08/min)
SWITZERLAND
www.samsung.com/
QATAR
www.samsung.com/
18252273
www.samsung.com/
SYRIA
RWANDA
ROMANIA
9999
08008 SAMSUNG (08008 726
7864)
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
0800-329-999
TOLL FREE No.
800-00-0077
9200-21230
TANZANIA
0685 88 99 00
RUSSIA
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
THAILAND
www.samsung.com/sa
SAUDI ARABIA
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/
SENEGAL
TURKEY
U.A.E
U.K
444 77 11
SERBIA
011 321 6899
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0330 SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 1-888-987-HELP(4357)
SINGAPORE
SLOVAKIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
U.S.A
0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678)
1969
U.S.A
(Mobile Phones)
SUDAN
UGANDA
0800 300 300
SWEDEN
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
365
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
0-800-502-000
WebSite
www.samsung.com/ua
UKRAINE
www.samsung.com/
URUGUAY
UZBEKISTAN
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
000 405 437 33
8-10-800-500-55-500
0-800-100-5303
1 800 588 889
ZAMBIA
0211 350370
366
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
802.11
AppleTalk
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
802.11b/g/n
BIT Depth
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
BMP
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
367
Glossary
Glossary
BOOTP
Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
CCD
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Collation
DADF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
368
Glossary
Glossary
DHCP
DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
Duplex
DLNA
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
DNS
Duty Cycle
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
369
Glossary
Glossary
ECM
EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor
of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation
FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
370
Glossary
Glossary
Gateway
IEEE
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
Grayscale
IEEE 1284
A shade of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
Mass storage device
Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-
volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating
platters with magnetic surfaces.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
371
Glossary
Glossary
IPM
ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
372
Glossary
Glossary
LDAP
MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
T T.6.
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MFP
MR
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
373
Glossary
Glossary
NetWare
OSI
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
374
Glossary
Glossary
PostScript
Protocol
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
RADIUS
PPM
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
PRN file
Resolution
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
375
Glossary
Glossary
SMB
TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
SMTP
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
Toner Cartridge
Subnet Mask
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination
of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
376
Glossary
Glossary
TWAIN
Watermark
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac
operating systems.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
USB
WPA
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
377
Glossary
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format.
378
Glossary
Index
reduce/enlarge
scan to
device options
direct printing utility
document box
general setup
A
accessories
installing
WPS
ordering
C
driver installation
Unix
address book
editing
cleaning
inside
general setup
group editing
group registering
registering
E
outside
pickup roller
easy document creator
e-book conversion
Eco
scan unit
cleaning a machine
clear button
control panel
touch screen
convention
using
eco printing
email address
searching
address book setup
administrator’s setup
AirPrint
storing
AnyWeb Print
authorized users
registering
copy
general setup
copying
entering character
error message
F
basic copying
reducing or enlarging copies
B
favorites settings, for printing
fax
buttons
Darkness
eco
D
automatic redialing
default settings
tray setting
canceling a reserved fax job
changing the receive modes
id copy
numeric keypad
379
Index
Index
delaying a fax transmission
preparing to fax
L
forwarding a received fax to another
destination
receiving in Fax mode
LCD display
features
forwarding a sent fax to another destination
machine features
print media feature
Linux
general setup
front view
common Linux problems
printing faxes on both sides of the paper
driver installation for network connected
G
receiving a fax in the computer
receiving faxes in memory
general icons
driver installation for USB cable connected
general settings
glossary
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected
receiving in DRPD mode
receiving in Fax mode
google cloud printing
printer properties
printing
receiving in secure mode
receiving in Tel mode
H
scanning
help button
receiving with ext. telephone
redialing the last number
sending a fax in the computer
system requirements
unifled driver configurator
using SetIP
I
id copy
linux scanning
loading
fax feature
fax sending
J
paper in multi-purpose tray
paper in the tray1
special media
jam
multi sending
clearing jam
faxing
tips for avoiding paper jams
adjusting darkness
adjusting resolution
loading originals
380
Index
Index
loading
output support
overlay printing
create
M
using special media
Mac
common Mac problems
N
delete
driver installation for network connected
network
print
driver installation
driver installation for USB cable connected
P
Linux
Mac
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected
Parallel connector
ordering
UNIX
Windows
printing
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude
postScript driver
troubleshooting
preparing originals type
print
general setup
installing environment
introducing network programs
IPv6 configuration
scanning
system requirements
using SetIP
mac scanning
SetIP program
wired network setup
wireless network setup
n-up printing
machine information
235,
general setup
mobile OS
machine setup
mobileprint
Mac
print media
memory
card stock
O
memory upgrading
envelope
optional tray
loading paper
ordering
memory/hard drive feature
menu overview
labels
output support
preprinted paper
multi-purpose tray
381
Index
Index
setting the paper size
setting the paper type
special media
using direct printing utility
printing a document
Linux
resolution
faxing
S
transparency
Mac
safety
print menu
UNIX
information
printer preferences
printing feature
problem
operating system problems
problems
symbols
Linux
Samsung Easy Document Creator
samsung printer experience
Samsung Printer Status
scan
printer status
general information
printing
copying problems
faxing problems
paper feeding problems
power problems
printing problems
printing quality problems
scanning problems
changing the default print settings
Linux
general setup
Mac
scan feature
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Mac
scan to cloud
Scanning
printing a document
Windows
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document
Creator
R
printing on both sides of paper
Mac
scanning
rear view
basic information
printing to a file
setting as a default machine
special printer features
UNIX
regulatiory information
reports
Linux scanning
Mac
231,
Scanning from network connected machine
USB memory
reset button
382
Index
Index
Scanning to email
Scanning to FTP/SMB server
Scanning using the WIA driver
USB flash memory
secu printing
Unix
T
system requirements
toner cartridge
USB
estimated life
USB cable
handling instructions
non-Samsung and refilled
redistributing toner
replacing the cartridge
storing
driver installation
secure release
driver reinstallation
USB flash memory
data backup
managing
service contact numbers
SetIP program
Special features
touch screen
printing
specifications
keyboard
scanning
print media
tray
using
status
adjusting the width and length
changing the tray size
loading paper in multi-purpose tray
ordering an optional tray
ordering an parallel connector
setting the paper size and type
keyboard
Storing
using help
supplies
available supplies
estimated toner cartridge life
monitoring the supplies life
ordering
W
watermark
create
U
delete
replacing toner cartridge
SyncThru Web Service
general information
SyncThru™ Web Service
edit
understanding the status LED
UNIX
Windows
common Windows problems
driver installation for network connected
driver installation for network connected
printing
383
Index
|
